Validation Manual

v3.
00

Composite Bridge Predesign Software

VALIDATION MANUAL

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 2 / 242

ACOBRI software

Validation Manual

Index Modification Date
A First edition Delivered with ACOBRI version v2.00 26/10/06
V3.00 Delivered with ACOBRI version v2.00.
Includes the Eurocode EN rules chapters 4 and 6.
10/03/08

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 3 / 242
SYNTHESIS

ACOBRI is a piece of software whose aim is to help for the design of composite bridges
using hot rolled sections. It is used for working out technical solutions during preparatory
engineering studies.
ACOBRI is able to deal with several codes: the French rules the German DIN standards and
the Eurocodes (ENV and EN versions). Three types of bridges can be considered: road
bridges, railways bridges and foot bridges. Several types of girders are covered, including
filler beam decks. For each set of data defined by the user, a calculation sheet is proposed
which details the results. A post processor is also available.
A typical calculation carried out with ACOBRI is the sequence of the following steps:
- Step 1: preparation of the Finite Elements calculations: creation of the grid model,
calculation of the parameters (masses, modular ratio, second moment of area, etc),
- Step 2: for each permanent or live load case, calculation of the moments and forces
in the elements of the model,
- Step 3: analysis and exploitation or the results: the specific criteria of the codes are
verified from the forces and moments found during the previous step.
This document deals with the validation of ACOBRI. To demonstrate the accuracy of the
results, the validation task is organised mainly around two reference bridges (one road
bridge and one railway bridge), calculated for german DIN rules. For this to bridges, each
step and its associated results are checked:
- First step: check of the masses, volumes, the modular ratio, the effective widths of
the concrete slab, the section parameters (Area, second moment of area, torsion
constants), the alternative values of the parameters being calculated with analytical
expressions or EXCEL applications. All deviations found are less than 1%.
- Second step: check of the shear forces and the bending moments for all load cases,
including the envelope forces and moments under live loads. The reference values
are obtained from an other Finite Elements application (ANSYS). The model is built
with exactly the same principle as in ACOBRI: same number of nodes and elements,
same meshing, same numbering, so that the comparison should be made easier.
The comparison between reference values and ACOBRI values shows:
o for significant values, the deviations are always less than 1% under
permanent loads.
o for significant values, the deviations are generally less than 2% for envelope
results under live loads. Some greater deviations have been obtained for
particular cases, due to the different assumptions and method used for both
calculations. It is to be noted here that ACOBRI is based upon a location of
the live load from the lines of influence to obtain the maximal effect whereas
the live loads are calculated with ANSYS by considering all possible locations
of this loads.
- Third step: check of verifications. All the verifications carried out by ACOBRI are
validated, which generally means to also calculate and to check intermediate
parameters (shear area, plastic moments, etc). The serviceability limit states, the
ultimate limit states and the fatigue limit states have been considered. The deviations
on intermediate parameters are less than 1%. The deviations on final criteria are less
than 2% for significant values. Greater values (but less than 4%) can sometimes be
obtained, but due to the deviations previously get from the step 2.
To cover a wider scope, additional cases have been considered for the steps 1 and 3:

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 4 / 242
- Step 1: 9 additional cases which covers other rules (ENV, French rules), any type of
bridges, any type of beams, including steel sheeting, concrete lost plank, concrete
haunches and filler beam deck. All deviations obtained are less than 1 %.
- Step 3: 6 additional cases have been considered, which cover the specific
verifications for concrete crossgirders, the assessment of the bending resistance of
class 3 or class 4 sections, the calculation of normal and shear stresses for various
type of cross sections or configuration not covered by the reference bridges. All
deviations obtained are less than 2%.
This work leads to the conclusion that the results obtained from ACOBRI are reliable.
The two reference bridges are also considered under EN rules, and the validation shows the
accuracy of the ACOBRI calculations for these rules.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 5 / 242
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 Aim of the document 10
2 Principles and conventions 11
2.1 PRINCIPLES 11
2.2 CONVENTIONS 11
2.3 ABBREVIATIONS 11
3 Reference Road Bridge under DIN rules 12
3.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE BRIDGE 12
3.2 FE MODELISATION 13
3.2.1 Effective widths of concrete for solicitations 13
3.2.2 Modular ratios 14
3.2.3 Masses 15
3.2.4 Moments of Inertia of the girders elements 16
3.2.5 Moments of inertia of the slab elements 16
3.3 VALIDATION OF LOADS AND SOLICITATIONS 16
3.3.1 Dead loads 16
3.3.1.1 Weight 16
3.3.1.2 Superstructure 16
3.3.1.3 Superstructure + 16
3.3.1.4 Equipment 16
3.3.1.5 Shrinkage of concrete 16
3.3.1.6 Thermal loads + 16
3.3.1.7 Thermal loads 16
3.3.2 Live loads 16
3.3.2.1 Load Model 1 Tandem system TS 16
3.3.2.2 Load Model 1 UDL system 16
3.3.2.3 Uniformly distributed loads on footways 16
3.3.2.4 Fatigue Load Model 3 on left slow lane 16
3.3.2.5 Fatigue Load Model 3 on right slow lane 16
3.4 VALIDATION OF VERIFICATIONS 16
3.4.1 Combinations 16
3.4.1.1 Abbreviations 16
3.4.1.2 Serviceability limit states 16
3.4.1.3 Ultimate limit states 16
3.4.1.4 Fatigue limit states 16
3.4.2 Section characteristics 16
3.4.2.1 Effective widths of concrete for verifications 16
3.4.2.2 Elastic Modulus 16
3.4.2.3 Positive plastic moment 16
3.4.2.4 Negative plastic moment 16

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 6 / 242
3.4.2.5 Shear area 16
3.4.3 Serviceability limit states 16
3.4.3.1 Deflection 16
3.4.3.2 Minimum reinforcement 16
3.4.3.3 Compression stresses in concrete 16
3.4.3.4 Tension stresses in reinforcement 16
3.4.3.5 Normal stresses in steel girders 16
3.4.3.6 Shear of steel girders 16
3.4.3.7 Interaction shear / normal stresses 16
3.4.4 Ultimate limit states 16
3.4.4.1 Shear force 16
3.4.4.2 Positive bending moment 16
3.4.4.3 Negative bending moment 16
3.4.4.4 Interaction M-V 16
3.4.4.5 Shear buckling 16
3.4.4.6 Lateral torsional buckling 16
3.4.5 Fatigue limit states 16
3.4.5.1 Additional amplification factor 16
3.4.5.2 Damage equivalence factor 16
3.4.5.3 Stress ranges in upper flange 16
3.4.5.4 Stress ranges in lower flange 16
3.5 CONNECTION 16
3.5.1 Shear resistance of the stud 16
3.5.2 Serviceability Limit States requirements 16
3.5.3 Ultimate Limit States requirements 16
4 Reference Road Bridge under EN rules 16
4.2.3 Masses 16
4.2.4 Moments of inertia of the girders elements 16
4.3 LOADS AND SOLICITATIONS 16
4.3.1 Dead loads 16
4.3.1.1 Weight 16
4.3.1.4 Shrinkage of concrete 16
4.3.1.5 Thermal loads + 16
4.3.1.6 Thermal loads - 16
4.3.2 Live loads 16
4.3.2.1 Load model 1 System TS 16

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 7 / 242
4.3.2.2 Load model 1 System UDL 16
4.3.2.3 Uniformly distributed loads on the footways 16
4.4 SECTIONS CHARACTERISTICS 16
4.4.1 Effective width of concrete for verifications 16
4.5.1.2 Stress limits 16
4.5.1.3 Control of cracking 16
4.5.2.1 Shear buckling 16
4.5.3.1 Stress ranges in the steel beam 16
5 Reference Railway Bridge 16
5.2.3 Masses 16
5.2.4 Second moments of area of the girders elements 16
5.3.1 Dead loads 16
5.3.1.1 Weight 16
5.3.1.2 Cantilevering Weight 16
5.3.2 Live loads 16
5.3.2.1 Assumptions 16
5.3.2.2 Load Model 71 16
5.3.2.3 Load Model SW0 16
5.4 VALIDATION OF EIGEN MODE 16
5.5.1 Combinations 16
5.5.1.1 Abbreviations 16
5.5.1.2 Serviceability limit states 16
5.5.1.3 Ultimate limit states 16
5.5.1.4 Fatigue limit states 16
5.5.2 Section characteristics 16
5.5.2.1 Effective widths of concrete for verifications 16

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 8 / 242
5.5.2.2 Elastic Modulus 16
5.5.2.3 Plastic moments 16
5.5.2.4 Shear area 16
5.5.3.1 Deflection of the rail track 16
5.5.3.2 Deck twist 16
5.5.3.3 Angular rotations at the end of the deck 16
5.5.3.5 Calculation of stresses 16
5.5.3.6 Compression stresses in concrete 16
5.5.3.7 Tension stresses in reinforcement 16
5.5.3.8 Normal stresses in steel girders 16
5.5.4.1 Shear force 16
5.5.4.2 Positive bending moment 16
5.5.4.3 Negative bending moment 16
5.5.5.1 Damage equivalent factor 16
5.5.5.2 Stress ranges 16
5.5.5.3 Stress ranges in upper flanges 16
5.5.5.4 Stress ranges in lower flanges 16
6 Reference railway Bridge under EN rules 16
6.2.3 Masses 16
6.3.1 Dead loads 16
6.3.1.1 Weight 16
6.3.1.2 Cantilevering weight 16
6.3.2 Live loads 16
6.3.3 Eigen mode 16
6.4.1.1 Deflection of the rail track 16
6.4.1.2 Stress limits 16

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 9 / 242
7 Validation of parameters 16
7.1 TEST N1 NORMAL BEAMS 16
7.2 TEST N2 BOX GIRDERS 16
7.2.1 DIN Rules 16
7.2.2 EN Rules 16
7.2.3 Symmetrical configuration of the DIN bridge 16
7.3 TEST N3 PREFABRICATED COMPOSITE GIRDERS 16
7.3.1 Eurocode ENV Rule 16
7.3.2 Eurocode EN Rule 16
7.4 TEST N4 BOX GIRDERS 16
7.5 TEST N5 STEEL SHEETING AND NON COMPOSITE PLANKS 16
7.5.1 Slab with steel sheeting, under DIN rules 16
7.5.2 Slab with steel sheeting, under EN rules 16
7.5.3 Slab with non composite concrete planks under DIN rules 16
7.5.4 Slab with non composite concrete planks under EN rules 16
7.6 TEST N6 FILLER BEAM DECK 16
7.6.1 Under DIN rules 16
7.6.2 Under EN rules 16
7.7 TEST N7 16
8 Validation of specific verifications 16
8.1 CONCRETE CROSSGIRDERS 16
8.1.1 ULS Verifications 16
8.1.2 SLS Verifications 16
8.2 WEB BUCKLING (ULS) 16
8.3 CLASS 3 SECTIONS (ULS) 16
8.4 CLASS 4 SECTIONS (ULS) 16
8.5 SHEAR STRESSES FOR DOUBLE SECTIONS 16
8.5.1 Box girders 16
8.5.2 Box girders filled with concrete 16
8.6 NORMAL STRESSES FOR SPECIFIC SECTIONS 16
8.6.1 Box girders and concrete haunches 16
8.6.2 Box girders and reinforcement 16

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 10 / 242
1 AIM OF THE DOCUMENT
ACOBRI is a piece of software whose aim is to help for the design of composite bridges
using hot rolled sections. It is used for working out technical solutions during preparatory
engineering studies.
ACOBRI is able to deal with several codes: the French rules the German DIN standards and
the Eucodes (ENV version). Three types of bridges can be considered: road bridges,
railways bridges and foot bridges. Several types of girders are covered, including filler beam
decks. For each set of data defined by the user, a calculation sheet is proposed which details
the results. A post processor is also available.
The aim of this document is to demonstrate the accuracy of the results given by ACOBRI.
The principle is to define reference tests, for which alternative calculations are proposed. The
results of these alternative calculations and the results given by ACOBRI will be compared.
The verifications carried out in this document are split up in the following points:
- Accuracy of the initial parameters (modular ratios, section properties, masses, etc).
- Check of the forces and moments for each individual load cases, including permanent
loads and live loads.
- Check of the verification criteria, under serviceability limit states, ultimate limit states
and fatigue limit states.
The document is organised about two reference bridges, one road bridge and one railway
bridge, both under DIN german rules. Some additional tests are proposed to cover other
configurations and other rules. A last chapter deals with the specific treatment of concrete
crossgirders, the assessment of the bending resistance of class 3 or class 4 sections, the
calculation of normal and shear stresses for various type of cross sections or configurations
not covered by the reference bridges.
This document focuses mainly on the DIN german rules because the three other codes are
supposed to be obsolete soon, after the publication of EN rules. The EN rules are planed to
be introduced in ACOBRI and will then be checked.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 11 / 242
2 PRINCIPLES AND CONVENTIONS
2.1 Principles
The most important part of the alternative results is obtained by Finite Element simulations,
carried out with ANSYS software. The principles of modelisation for these simulations are the
same as ACOBRI (ie same number and numbering of nodes, elements), which leads to
easier comparisons.
It is not possible to reproduce the same method of calculation of live loads with ANSYS,
because ANSYS doesnt deal with lines of influence and research of the worst location of the
loads. An alternative method has been used which is based upon the displacement of live
loads upon the bridge with a predefined step. The choice of live loads location is detailed in
the document for each live load.
The results are treated with the same methods as ACOBRI, so that final results should be
the same. At the end, the results obtained by ACOBRI and by the alternative methods are
compared, with an assessment of the deviations. The important values of deviations, if any,
are explained.
For each test, the parameters (rule, type of bridge, type of beams etc) are detailed. The
name of the .APM file is also proposed.
2.2 Conventions
For this document, the same convention as in ACOBRI is used, ie:

- A positive moment is a moment which tends to crack the concrete slab.
- A negative moment is a moment which tends to compress the concrete slab.
- A compression stress is positive
- A tension stress is negative

It is to be noted that the results of ANSYS calculations have the opposite convention. As a
consequence, the sign of moments obtained with ANSYS will be changed in this document,
to be homogeneous with the convention.
2.3 Abbreviations
Generally, the results will be displayed in tables. According to their origin, the following
abbreviation will be used:
- RV: Reference value, calculated by an alternative method (for example, theoretical
calculations or ANSYS results).
- CS: Result calculated by ACOBRI and read in the Calculation Sheet
- PP: Result calculated by ACOBRI and read in the Post Processing

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 12 / 242
3 REFERENCE ROAD BRIDGE UNDER DIN RULES
3.1 Description of the bridge
REFERENCE ROAD BRIDGE
Road bridge DIN rules
Normal beams Three beams, three spans
Main parameters of the bridge :
Total length = 52 m. Span lengths: span 1 and 3 = 15 m; span 2 = 22 m.
Slab: Width = 10 m; Depth = 27 cm; = 2500 kg/m
3

Stud diameter: 22 mm
Section of the beams: Edge beams: HE 800A
Intermediate beam : HE 700B
A footway on each side of the slab. Left Footway width = 2.5 m.
Right Footway width = 0.5 m
Main parameters of the loads:
Footway: Thickness = 210 mm = 2450 kg/m
3

Waterproof layer: Thickness = 30 mm = 2400 kg/m
3

Roadway surfacing: Thickness = 80 mm = 2300 kg/m
3

Security barrier on each side of the bridge. Equivalent load : 1 kN/m
Other loads: at 1.75 m of the left side: 0.525 kN/m
Live loads on footways (pedestrians): only on the left one, on all its width.
No live load on the right footway.
File: ROAD_DIN_1.APM

The transverse drawing of the bridge is represented on the following figure:

Figure 1 : Transverse drawing of the road bridge

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 13 / 242

Figure 2 : Top drawing of the road bridge

3.2 FE modelisation
A Finite Element Model of the bridge is done, based upon the Beam grid principles. The FE
piece of software ANSYS v10.0 is used. The same meshing and numbering are used as for
the ACOBRI modelisation, so that the comparisons will be made easier. The elements
properties are calculated hereafter.
3.2.1 Effective widths of concrete for solicitations
For each span, the effective width of the concrete slab is given by the following relation:
l
i
= b
0
+ L
e
/ 4
For DIN rules:
End span: L
e
= 0.85 x length of the span
Intermediate span: L
e
b
0
is the transverse spacing between two studs. Because the stud repartition is not known at
this step of the calculations, the following relation is used:
b
0
= b
f
2.5 d
s
= 0.3 2.5 x 0.022 = 0.245 m
Where b
f
is the flange width and d
s
the stud diameter.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 14 / 242
Theoretical values:
So theoretical values of the effective widths of concrete slab are given in the hereafter
table:

Spans
1 2 3
Length (m) 15 22 15
Line
l
1
(m)
3.43 3.43 2.97 (*)
of
l
2
(m)
3.50 (*) 3.50 (*) 3.00 (*)
girders
l
3
(m)
3.43 3.43 2.97 (*)
(*): due to physical limits
ACOBRI values:
The values given in the calculation sheet of ACOBRI are given hereafter, chapter
Properties of sections:

Spans
1 2 3
Line
l
1
(m)
3.43 3.43 2.97
of
l
2
(m)
3.50 3.50 3.00
girders
l
3
(m)
3.43 3.43 2.97

3.2.2 Modular ratios
Following calculations according to DIN104 4.2.3 (4).
Characteristic value of compressive strength of concrete: f
ck
= 35 MPa
Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete: E
cm
= 9500 (f
ck
+ 8)
1/3
E
cm
= 33282 MPa
Modular ratio for short term loading: n
0
= E
a
/ E
cm
= 6.31
Cross sectional area of concrete: A
c
= 10x0.27 = 2.7 m
2

Perimeter of slab in contact with atm.: u ~ 2x(10 + 0.27) = 20.54 m
Notional size: h
0
= 2 A
c
/ u = 262.9 mm
Mean value of compressive strength: f
cm
= f
ck
+ 8 = 43 MPa
Coefficients for the influence of concrete strength:

1
= (35/f
cm
)
0.7
= 0.866

2
= (35/f
cm
)
0.2
= 0.960
Factor for the effect of relative humidity:

RH
=
2
[1 +
1
(1 RH/100) / (0.10
3
0
h )] = 1.219
Factor for the effect of concrete strength: (f
cm
) = 16.8 /
cm
f = 2.56
Factor for the effect of concrete age: (t
0
) = 1 / (0.1 + t
0
0.2
)
Coefficient for the development of creep:
c
(t - t
0
) = 1 for t =

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 15 / 242
Creep coefficient:
t
=
0

c
(t-t
0
)
Notional creep coefficient:
0
=
RH
(f
cm
) (t
0
)
Modular ratio: n
eq
= n
0
(1 +
L

t
)
Theoretical values:
So theoretical values of modular ratios are given in the hereafter table:

Reference
values

L
t
0
(t
0
)
0
n
eq

Shrinkage and thermal 0.55 1
0,909 2,839 16.16
Dead loads 1.1 45
0,446 1,394 15.98
Vert. adjustment of support 1.5 45
0,446 1,394 19.50
Live loads 0 / / / 6.31

The values of
L
and t
0
used in this example are the recommended values. These
values can be modified in ACOBRI.

ACOBRI values:
The values given in the calculation sheet of ACOBRI are given hereafter, chapter
Loads and Combinations:

n
eq

Shrinkage and thermal
16.16
Dead loads
15.98
Live loads 6.31

No deviations are observed.

3.2.3 Masses
Theoretical values:
Area of the section: HE800A: 285.8 cm
2

HE700 B: 306.4 cm
2

Length of the bridge: 52 m
Total mass of steel: 7850x52x(0.03064+2x0.02858) = 35824 kg
Overlenght: 2 x 200 mm = 400 mm
Corrected mass of steel: 35824x52.4/52 = 36099 kg
Volume of concrete slab: 52x10x0.27 = 140.4 m
3

Mass of concrete: 2500x140.4 = 351000 kg

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 16 / 242

Mass of waterproof layer: 7x52x0.03x2400 = 26208 kg
Footways: 3x52x0.21x2450 = 80262 kg
Roadway surfacing: 7x52x0.08x2300 = 66976 kg

ACOBRI values:

RV CS PP
Actual mass of steel (kg) 35824 35840
Corrected mass of steel (kg) 36099 36117
Overlength (mm) 400 2 x 200
Volume of concrete (m
3
) 140.4 140.4
Mass of concrete (kg) 351000 351000
Waterproof layer mass (kg) 26208 26208
Footways mass (kg) 80262 80262
Roadway surfacing mass (kg) 66976 66976

3.2.4 Moments of Inertia of the girders elements
Theoretical values hereunder have been calculated with a specific EXCEL application.
Line of girders n1: HE 800 A

Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
(cm4)
RV CS RV CS RV CS
Construction phase 303400 303440 596.9 596.9
Spans 1 and 3 : Effective width of slab = 3.43 m
Shrinkage and thermal 873957 874074 70226 70265
Dead loads phase 876342 876469 71010 71052
Live loads phase 1064613 1064768
548546 548679
178919 179058
Span 2: Effective width of slab = 3.50 m
Dead loads phase 880636 880609 72447 72438
552258 552258
182558 182568

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 17 / 242
Line of girders n2: HE 700 B

Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
(cm4)
RV CS RV CS RV CS
Dead loads phase 763537 763656 71245 71287
469145 469263
179152 179292
Dead loads phase 767539 767514 72681 72672
472422 472422
182792 182802


Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
(cm4)
RV CS RV CS RV CS
Dead loads phase 845452 845151 61567 61482
523168 522954
155004 154817
Dead loads phase 847623 847595 62183 62175
524877 524877
156564 156571

All deviations are less than 1%.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 18 / 242
3.2.5 Moments of inertia of the slab elements
Because of the important number of slab elements, only few specific ones will be checked.
All ACOBRI values given hereafter come from the post processing module.
Longitudinal elements:
Slab elements n1 and n61 will be checked hereunde r (see Figure 3).

Figure 3 : Checking of longitudinal slab elements
The theoretical expressions for the elements characteristics are given by:

I
y
= k
1
k
2

eq
3
n 12
e b
and I
t
= k
1
k
2

eq
3
n 6
e b

Where:

I
y
, I
t
: Second moment of area and torsional inertia of the slab element
k
1
: k
1
= 1.0
k
2
: Coefficient to take care of the location of longitudinal slab elements
about main girder elements. k
2
= 0.01 if the element is located in the
effective width attached to the girder (element n6 1) and k
2
= 1 if not
(element n1)
b: Width of the slab element.
e: Thickness of the slab element. e = 270 mm for all slab elements of
this bridge.
n
eq
: Modular ratio

x = 0
Longitudinal slab
elements
Longitudinal girder
elements
Elt n1 Elt n61
1.75
0.875

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 19 / 242

Slab element n1 Slab element n61
Width b (mm) 0.4375 0.875
Coefficient k
2
1.0 0.01
RV ACOBRI RV ACOBRI
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 4491 4490 89.8 90
n
eq
= 15.98 I
t
(cm
3
) 8981 8980 179.6 180
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 4441 4440 88.8 89
n
eq
= 16.16 I
t
(cm
3
) 8881 8880 177.6 178
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 11373 11373 227.5 227
n
eq
= 6.31 I
t
(cm
3
) 22745 22746 454.9 455

All deviations are less than 0.2 % and are due to rounded values.

Transverse elements:
Slab elements n721 and n732 will be checked hereu nder (see Figure 4).

Figure 4 : Checking of transverse slab elements

The same relations as for longitudinal slab elements are used to calculate the inertias,
with k
2
= 1.0 for all transverse elements.

x = 0
Transverse slab
elements
Elt n721
Elt n732
0.875
0.75
0.75

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 20 / 242

Width b (mm) 0.375 0.75
Theo. values ACOBRI Theo. values ACOBRI
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 3849 3849 7698 7697
n
eq
= 15.98 I
t
(cm
3
) 7698 7697 15396 15398
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 3806 3806 7612 7611
n
eq
= 15.98 I
t
(cm
3
) 7613 7611 15225 15222
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 9748 9748 19496 19497
n
eq
= 15.98 I
t
(cm
3
) 19496 19497 38992 38994


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 21 / 242
3.3 Validation of loads and solicitations
3.3.1 Dead loads
Because of the huge number of values to be checked, it has been decided to present in this
chapter the results obtained only for the following specific sections of the first girder: sections
on supports, sections at the limits of cracked zone for the intermediate supports and mid
span sections (see Figure 5). The other results will be displayed on figures.

Figure 5 : Sections of the first girder to be checked
Support
Section n1
Support
Support
Support
Limit of
cracked zone
Limit of
cracked zone
Limit of
cracked zone
Limit of
cracked zone
Mid-span
Mid-span
Mid-span
S
p
a
n

n
1

S
p
a
n

n
2

S
p
a
n

n
3

Section n10
Section n16
Section n19
Section n23
Section n31
Section n39
Section n43
Section n46
Section n52
Section n61

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 22 / 242
3.3.1.1 Weight
The load case Weight represents the effects of the weight of steel beams and of the
concrete of the slab just after the pouring. Only the rigidities of the steel beams are
considered.
Bending moment
On the left (kNm) On the right (kNm)
Section Span Type ANSYS ACOBRI Deviat. ANSYS ACOBRI Deviat.
1 1 S x x x 0 -10 /
10 1 M -251.3 -251.3 0.00 % -251.3 -251.3 0.00 %
16 1 L 422.0 422.2 0.03 % 422.0 422.2 0.03 %
19 1-2 S 924.7 924.9 0.02 % 924.7 924.9 0.02 %
23 2 L 141.8 141.8 0.01 % 141.8 141.8 0.01 %
31 2 M -610.5 -610.7 0.03 % -610.5 -610.7 0.03 %
39 2 L 141.8 141.8 0.01 % 141.8 141.8 0.01 %
43 2-3 S 924.7 924.9 0.02 % 924.7 924.9 0.02 %
46 3 L 422.0 422.2 0.03 % 422.0 422.2 0.03 %
52 3 M -251.3 -251.3 0.00 % -251.3 -251.3 0.00 %
61 3 S 0 -10 / x x x
Type Legend: S: Support L: Limit of cracked area M: Mid span section
A very good accuracy of results can be observed (all deviations less than 1%). The
symmetry of the results is also seen. For the two others files of girders, results are
displayed on the following figure:

Figure 6 : Bending moments under Weight load case
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 23 / 242
Shear force
On the left (kN) On the right (kN)
1 1 S x x x -119.2 -119.2 0.01 %
10 1 M 506.1 50.56 -0.10 % 72.8 72.8 -0.06 %
16 1 L 183.8 183.8 -0.02 % 204.4 204.4 0.01 %
19 1-2 S 242.4 242.5 0.02 % -268.6 -268.7 0.04 %
23 2 L -205.8 -205.9 0.06 % -183.2 -183.2 0.01 %
31 2 M -121.8 -12.21 0.25 % 121.8 12.22 0.33 %
39 2 L 183.2 183.2 0.01 % 205.9 205.9 -0.01 %
43 2-3 S 268.7 268.7 0.00 % -242.4 -242.5 0.02 %
46 3 L -204.4 -204.4 0.01 % -183.7 -183.8 0.05 %
52 3 M -72.7 -72.8 0.12 % -72.7 -72.8 0.12 %
61 3 S 119.2 119.2 0.01 % x x x
symmetry of the results is also seen.
3.3.1.2 Superstructure
The load case Superstructure includes the weights of the footway, of the waterproof layer
and of the roadway surfacing.
Bending moment
1 1 S x x x 0.1 0.1 /
10 1 M -185,1 -185,3 0,14% -185,0 -185,5 0,24%
16 1 L 200,2 200,3 0,02% 200,2 199,8 -0,22%
19 1-2 S 509,6 509,2 -0,06% 511,8 511,5 -0,06%
23 2 L 24,0 24,0 0,10% 25,1 25,2 0,07%
31 2 M -420,6 -421,0 0,09% -420,6 -421,0 0,09%
39 2 L 25,1 25,2 0,07% 24,0 24,0 0,07%
43 2-3 S 511,8 511,5 -0,06% 509,6 509,2 -0,06%
46 3 L 200,2 199,8 -0,22% 200,2 200,3 0,02%
52 3 M -185,0 -185,5 0,25% -185,1 -185,3 0,14%
61 3 S 0.1 0.1 / x x x

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 24 / 242
A very good accuracy of results can be observed. The symmetry of the results is also
seen. For the two others files of girders, results are displayed on the following figure:

Figure 7 : Bending moments under Superstructure load case
Shear force
1 1 S x x x -77,4 -77,3 -0,04%
10 1 M 25,9 25,8 -0,28% 39,3 39,3 0,00%
16 1 L 108,7 108,7 0,01% 122,4 122,9 0,37%
19 1-2 S 151,9 152,0 0,10% -168,1 -168,6 0,31%
23 2 L -128,1 -127,6 -0,35% -112,2 -112,2 -0,02%
31 2 M -7,2 -7,2 0,61% 7,2 7,2 0,58%
39 2 L 112,2 112,2 -0,02% 128,1 127,6 -0,35%
43 2-3 S 169,1 168,6 -0,29% -151,9 -152,0 0,10%
46 3 L -122,4 -122,9 0,37% -108,6 -108,7 0,08%
52 3 M -39,2 -39,3 0,19% -39,2 -39,3 0,19%
61 3 S 77,4 77,3 -0,05% x x x

-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI
Moments (kNm)

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 25 / 242
3.3.1.3 Superstructure +
The load case Superstructure + includes the loads of the case Superstructure with an
additional load of 0.5 kN/m
2
on the roadway surfacing to take into account the future
maintenance of the bridge.
Bending moment
1 1 S x x x 0.0 0.0 /
10 1 M -191,7 -191,9 0,14% -191,6 -192,0 0,24%
16 1 L 210,4 210,5 0,02% 210,4 210,0 -0,20%
19 1-2 S 530,4 530,1 -0,06% 532,6 532,3 -0,05%
23 2 L 25,9 26,0 0,07% 26,9 26,9 0,08%
31 2 M -441,9 -442,2 0,08% -441,9 -442,3 0,08%
39 2 L 26,9 26,9 0,08% 25,9 26,0 0,12%
43 2-3 S 532,6 532,3 -0,05% 530,4 530,1 -0,06%
46 3 L 210,4 210,0 -0,20% 210,4 210,5 0,02%
52 3 M -191,6 -192,0 0,24% -191,7 -191,9 0,13%
61 3 S 0.0 0.0 / x x x

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 26 / 242

Figure 8 : Bending moments under Superstructure + load case
Shear force
1 1 S x x x -79,9 -79,9 -0,05%
10 1 M 27,2 27,1 -0,35% 41,2 41,2 -0,01%
16 1 L 112,9 112,9 0,01% 126,9 127,4 0,36%
19 1-2 S 156,8 157,0 0,09% -174,1 -174,7 0,30%
23 2 L -133,3 -132,8 -0,33% -117,1 -117,1 -0,02%
31 2 M -7,6 -7,6 -0,08% 7,6 7,6 0,01%
39 2 L 117,1 117,1 -0,02% 133,3 132,8 -0,35%
43 2-3 S 175,1 174,6 -0,28% -156,8 -157,0 0,09%
46 3 L -126,9 -127,4 0,36% -112,8 -112,9 0,08%
52 3 M -41,1 -41,2 0,19% -41,1 -41,2 0,19%
61 3 S 79,9 79,9 -0,05% x x x

-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 27 / 242
3.3.1.4 Equipment
The load case Equipment includes the effects of the linear loads located on the slab,
representing all other permanent loads not considered in the Weight or Superstructure
laods, including the loads of the security barriers.
Bending moment
1 1 S x x x 0.1 0.1 /
10 1 M -20,9 -20,9 -0,02% -21,0 -21,0 0,02%
16 1 L 18,6 18,6 -0,01% 18,6 18,6 -0,01%
19 1-2 S 53,6 53,6 -0,01% 53,9 53,9 -0,01%
23 2 L 1,7 1,7 0,33% 2,0 2,0 -0,03%
31 2 M -39,6 -39,6 -0,02% -39,6 -39,6 -0,02%
39 2 L 2,0 2,0 0,01% 1,7 1,7 0,40%
43 2-3 S 53,9 53,9 0,00% 53,6 53,6 0,00%
46 3 L 18,6 18,6 -0,03% 18,6 18,6 -0,02%
52 3 M -21,0 -21,0 0,02% -20,9 -20,9 -0,02%
61 3 S 0.1 0.1 / x x x

A very good accuracy of results can be observed (all deviations lass than 1%). The

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 28 / 242

Figure 9 : Bending moments under Equipment load case
Shear force
1 1 S x x x -8,8 -8,8 -0,07%
10 1 M 2,4 2,4 -0,34% 3,8 3,8 -0,13%
16 1 L 11,8 11,8 -0,03% 13,6 13,6 -0,06%
19 1-2 S 17,5 17,5 0,01% -18,7 -18,7 0,03%
23 2 L -13,3 -13,3 0,02% -11,3 -11,3 0,00%
31 2 M -0,6 -0,6 -0,43% 0,6 0,6 -0,37%
39 2 L 11,3 11,3 -0,04% 13,3 13,3 -0,08%
43 2-3 S 18,7 18,7 -0,02% -17,5 -17,5 0,02%
46 3 L -13,6 -13,6 -0,04% -11,7 -11,8 0,04%
52 3 M -3,8 -3,8 0,08% -3,8 -3,8 0,08%
61 3 S 8,8 8,8 -0,07% x x x


-40
-20
0
20
40
60
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 29 / 242
3.3.1.5 Shrinkage of concrete
The load case Shrinkage includes the effects of the shrinkage of the slab concrete. It is
based on the application of equivalent moments (called hereafter isotropic moments), whose
formulas are given below. The effect obtained for this load case will be called the global
effect. The hyperstatic effect is the difference between the global effect and the isotropic
effect, ie the effects due to the hyperstaticity of the structure.
It is to be noted that the isotropic moment is equal to zero in the cracked zone.
The theoretical relations used for a section are:
M
iso
= N
Shrink

G

N
Shrink
=
Shrink
E
b
A
b

With:
N
Shrink
Normal force in the slab, due to the shrinkage.
Shrink
Relative deformation of the shrinkage. For this bridge,
Shrink
= 310 10
-6

G
Spacing between the centroids of the composite section and the effective
section of the slab.
E
b
Young modulus of concrete
A
b
Effective area of concrete to be considered for the section.

Bending global moment
1 1 S x x x -656,7 -656,9 0,02%
10 1 M -436,0 -436,1 0,03% -436,0 -436,1 0,03%
16 1 L -270,6 -270,8 0,05% 385,5 385,6 0,01%
19 1-2 S 460,9 461,0 0,01% 462,7 462,8 0,01%
23 2 L 456,9 457,0 0,01% -205,4 -205,4 -0,03%
31 2 M -215,0 -215,0 -0,02% -215,0 -215,0 -0,02%
39 2 L -205,4 -205,4 -0,03% 456,9 457,0 0,01%
43 2-3 S 462,7 462,8 0,01% 460,9 461,0 0,01%
46 3 L 385,5 385,6 0,01% -270,6 -270,8 0,05%
52 3 M -436,0 -436,1 0,04% -436,0 -436,1 0,04%
61 3 S -656,7 -656,9 0,02% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 30 / 242

Figure 10 : Global bending moments under Shrinkage load case

Bending isotropic moment
Section Span Type Theo. ACOBRI Deviat. Theo. ACOBRI Deviat.
1 1 S x x x -658,1 -656,12 -0,30%
10 1 M -658,1 -656,12 -0,30% -658,1 -656,12 -0,30%
16 1 L -658,1 -656,12 -0,30% 0,0 0
19 1-2 S 0,0 0 0,0 0
23 2 L 0,0 0 -662,4 -662,37 0,00%
31 2 M -662,4 -662,37 0,00% -662,4 -662,37 0,00%
39 2 L -662,4 -662,37 0,00% 0,0 0
43 2-3 S 0,0 0 0,0 0
46 3 L 0,0 0 -658,1 -658,12 0,00%
52 3 M -658,1 -658,12 0,00% -658,1 -658,12 0,00%
61 3 S -658,1 -658,12 0,00% x x x

-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 31 / 242
Bending orthotropic moment
1 1 S x x x 1,4 1,24 /
10 1 M 222,2 222,00 -0,07% 222,2 222,02 -0,06%
16 1 L 387,5 387,35 -0,03% 385,5 385,55 0,01%
19 1-2 S 460,9 460,99 0,01% 462,7 462,78 0,01%
23 2 L 456,9 456,95 0,01% 456,9 457 0,01%
31 2 M 447,4 447,40 0,01% 447,4 447,4 0,01%
39 2 L 456,9 457,00 0,01% 456,9 456,96 0,01%
43 2-3 S 462,7 462,78 0,01% 460,9 460,99 0,01%
46 3 L 385,5 385,55 0,01% 387,5 387,35 -0,03%
52 3 M 222,2 222,01 -0,07% 222,2 221,99 -0,07%
61 3 S 1,4 1,24 / x x x

Normal force in the slab
On the left x1000 (kN) On the right x1000 (kN)
1 1 S x x x 3,733 3,73281 -0,02%
10 1 M 3,733 3,73281 -0,02% 3,733 3,73281 -0,02%
16 1 L 3,733 3,73281 -0,02% 0,000 0
19 1-2 S 0,000 0 0,000 0
23 2 L 0,000 0 3,807 3,80622 -0,02%
31 2 M 3,807 3,80622 -0,02% 3,807 3,80622 -0,02%
39 2 L 3,807 3,80622 -0,02% 0,000 0
43 2-3 S 0,000 0 0,000 0
46 3 L 0,000 0 3,733 3,73281 -0,02%
52 3 M 3,733 3,73281 -0,02% 3,733 3,73281 -0,02%
61 3 S 3,733 3,73281 -0,02% x x x

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 32 / 242
Shear force
1 1 S x x x 31,3 31,3 -0,01%
10 1 M 30,6 30,7 0,02% 31,2 31,1 -0,04%
16 1 L 29,9 29,9 0,03% 30,4 30,5 0,04%
19 1-2 S 36,4 36,4 0,02% -1,1 -1,1 -1,42%
23 2 L -2,0 -2,0 -0,01% -2,0 -2,0 -0,33%
31 2 M -0,2 -0,2 8,79% 0,2 0,2 8,09%
39 2 L 2,0 2,0 -0,32% 1,9 1,9 -0,48%
43 2-3 S 1,1 1,1 0,68% -36,4 -36,4 0,02%
46 3 L -30,4 -30,4 0,00% -29,9 -29,9 0,02%
52 3 M -31,1 -31,2 0,07% -31,1 -31,2 0,07%
61 3 S -31,3 -31,3 -0,01% x x x


3.3.1.6 Thermal loads +
The load case Thermal loads + includes the effects of a positive difference of temperature
equal to 10C between the slab and the steel girder s. The same principles of calculations are
used as for Shrinkage load case, with:
Shrink
= -
T
T

T
: Thermal dilatation coefficient (1,0 10
-5
/C for steel)
T : T = 10C.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 33 / 242

1 1 S x x x 211,8 211,9 0,03%
10 1 M 92,6 92,7 0,06% 92,6 92,7 0,04%
16 1 L 7,0 7,1 0,45% 7,0 7,1 0,57%
19 1-2 S -30,0 -29,9 -0,10% -28,6 -28,7 0,06%
23 2 L -28,9 -28,9 0,10% -28,9 -28,9 0,09%
31 2 M -29,1 -29,1 0,09% -29,1 -29,1 0,09%
39 2 L -28,9 -28,9 0,09% -28,9 -28,9 0,10%
43 2-3 S -28,6 -28,7 0,06% -30,0 -29,9 -0,10%
46 3 L 7,0 7,1 0,57% 7,0 7,1 0,59%
52 3 M 92,6 92,7 0,05% 92,6 92,7 0,06%
61 3 S 211,8 211,9 0,03% x x x

Figure 11 : Global bending moments under Thermal loads + load case

-50
250
0
50
100
150
200
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 34 / 242

1 1 S x x x 212,3 212,3 0,00%
10 1 M 212,3 212,3 0,00% 212,3 212,3 0,00%
16 1 L 212,3 212,3 0,00% 212,3 212,3 0,00%
19 1-2 S 212,3 212,3 0,00% 213,7 213,67 0,00%
23 2 L 213,7 213,67 0,00% 213,7 213,67 0,00%
31 2 M 213,7 213,67 0,00% 213,7 213,67 0,00%
39 2 L 213,7 213,67 0,00% 213,7 213,67 0,00%
43 2-3 S 213,7 213,67 0,00% 212,3 212,3 0,00%
46 3 L 212,3 212,3 0,00% 212,3 212,3 0,00%
52 3 M 212,3 212,3 0,00% 212,3 212,3 0,00%
61 3 S 212,3 212,3 0,00% x x x


1 1 S x x x -0,5 -0,4 /
10 1 M -119,7 -119,63 -0,04% -119,7 -119,64 -0,04%
16 1 L -205,3 -205,23 -0,01% -205,2 -205,21 -0,02%
19 1-2 S -242,3 -242,24 -0,01% -242,3 -242,32 0,01%
23 2 L -242,6 -242,59 0,01% -242,6 -242,59 0,01%
31 2 M -242,7 -242,76 0,01% -242,7 -242,76 0,01%
39 2 L -242,6 -242,59 0,01% -242,6 -242,59 0,01%
43 2-3 S -242,3 -242,32 0,01% -242,3 -242,24 -0,01%
46 3 L -205,2 -205,21 -0,02% -205,3 -205,22 -0,02%
52 3 M -119,7 -119,63 -0,05% -119,7 -119,63 -0,04%
61 3 S -0,5 -0,40 / x x x

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 35 / 242


On the left x 1000 (kN) On the right x1000 (kN)
1 1 S x x x -1,204 -1,204 -0,03%
10 1 M -1,204 -1,204 -0,03% -1,204 -1,204 -0,03%
16 1 L -1,204 -1,204 -0,03% -1,204 -1,204 -0,03%
19 1-2 S -1,204 -1,204 -0,03% -1,228 -1,228 -0,02%
23 2 L -1,228 -1,228 -0,02% -1,228 -1,228 -0,02%
31 2 M -1,228 -1,228 -0,02% -1,228 -1,228 -0,02%
39 2 L -1,228 -1,228 -0,02% -1,228 -1,228 -0,02%
43 2-3 S -1,228 -1,228 -0,02% -1,204 -1,204 -0,03%
46 3 L -1,204 -1,204 -0,03% -1,204 -1,204 -0,03%
52 3 M -1,204 -1,204 -0,03% -1,204 -1,204 -0,03%
61 3 S -1,204 -1,204 -0,03% x x x

Shear force

1 1 S x x x -16,6 -16,6 -0,01%
10 1 M -16,1 -16,1 -0,01% -16,2 -16,2 -0,01%
16 1 L -16,4 -16,4 0,04% -16,4 -16,4 0,04%
19 1-2 S -16,6 -16,6 -0,02% -0,1 -0,1 /
23 2 L -0,1 -0,1 / 0,0 -0,1 /
31 2 M 0,0 0,0 / 0,0 0,0 /
39 2 L 0,0 0,1 / 0,1 0,1 /
43 2-3 S 0,1 0,1 / 16,6 16,6 -0,02%
46 3 L 16,4 16,4 0,04% 16,4 16,4 -0,02%
52 3 M 16,2 16,2 0,12% 16,2 16,2 0,12%
61 3 S 16,6 16,6 -0,01% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 36 / 242
3.3.1.7 Thermal loads
The load case Thermal loads - includes the effects of a positive difference of temperature
equal to -10C between the slab and the steel girde rs. The same principles of calculations
are used as for Thermal loads + load case, with T = -10C.


1 1 S x x x -211,8 -211,9 0,03%
10 1 M -92,6 -92,7 0,06% -92,6 -92,7 0,04%
16 1 L -7,0 -7,1 0,45% -7,0 -7,1 0,57%
19 1-2 S 30,0 29,9 -0,10% 28,6 28,7 0,06%
23 2 L 28,9 28,9 0,10% 28,9 28,9 0,09%
31 2 M 29,1 29,1 0,09% 29,1 29,1 0,09%
39 2 L 28,9 28,9 0,09% 28,9 28,9 0,10%
43 2-3 S 28,6 28,7 0,06% 30,0 29,9 -0,10%
46 3 L -7,0 -7,1 0,57% -7,0 -7,1 0,59%
52 3 M -92,6 -92,7 0,05% -92,6 -92,7 0,06%
61 3 S -211,8 -211,9 0,03% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 37 / 242

Figure 12 : Global bending moments under Thermal loads - load case


1 1 S x x x -212,3 -212,3 0,00%
10 1 M -212,3 -212,3 0,00% -212,3 -212,3 0,00%
16 1 L -212,3 -212,3 0,00% -212,3 -212,3 0,00%
19 1-2 S -212,3 -212,3 0,00% -213,7 -213,67 0,00%
23 2 L -213,7 -213,67 0,00% -213,7 -213,67 0,00%
31 2 M -213,7 -213,67 0,00% -213,7 -213,67 0,00%
39 2 L -213,7 -213,67 0,00% -213,7 -213,67 0,00%
43 2-3 S -213,7 -213,67 0,00% -212,3 -212,3 0,00%
46 3 L -212,3 -212,3 0,00% -212,3 -212,3 0,00%
52 3 M -212,3 -212,3 0,00% -212,3 -212,3 0,00%
61 3 S -212,3 -212,3 0,00% x x x

-250
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 38 / 242


1 1 S x x x 0,5 0,4 -12,66%
10 1 M 119,7 119,63 -0,04% 119,7 119,64 -0,04%
16 1 L 205,3 205,23 -0,01% 205,2 205,21 -0,02%
19 1-2 S 242,3 242,24 -0,01% 242,3 242,32 0,01%
23 2 L 242,6 242,59 0,01% 242,6 242,59 0,01%
31 2 M 242,7 242,76 0,01% 242,7 242,76 0,01%
39 2 L 242,6 242,59 0,01% 242,6 242,59 0,01%
43 2-3 S 242,3 242,32 0,01% 242,3 242,24 -0,01%
46 3 L 205,2 205,21 -0,02% 205,3 205,22 -0,02%
52 3 M 119,7 119,63 -0,05% 119,7 119,63 -0,04%
61 3 S 0,5 0,40 -12,66% x x x


On the left x1000 (kN) On the right x1000 (kN)
1 1 S x x x 1,204 1,204 -0,03%
10 1 M 1,204 1,204 -0,03% 1,204 1,204 -0,03%
16 1 L 1,204 1,204 -0,03% 1,204 1,204 -0,03%
19 1-2 S 1,204 1,204 -0,03% 1,228 1,228 -0,02%
23 2 L 1,228 1,228 -0,02% 1,228 1,228 -0,02%
31 2 M 1,228 1,228 -0,02% 1,228 1,228 -0,02%
39 2 L 1,228 1,228 -0,02% 1,228 1,228 -0,02%
43 2-3 S 1,228 1,228 -0,02% 1,204 1,204 -0,03%
46 3 L 1,204 1,204 -0,03% 1,204 1,204 -0,03%
52 3 M 1,204 1,204 -0,03% 1,204 1,204 -0,03%
61 3 S 1,204 1,204 -0,03% x x x

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 39 / 242

Shear force

1 1 S x x x 16,6 16,6 -0,01%
10 1 M 16,1 16,1 -0,01% 16,2 16,2 -0,01%
16 1 L 16,4 16,4 0,04% 16,4 16,4 0,04%
19 1-2 S 16,6 16,6 -0,02% 0,1 0,1 /
23 2 L 0,1 0,1 / 0,0 0,1 /
31 2 M 0,0 0,0 / 0,0 0,0 /
39 2 L 0,0 -0,1 / -0,1 -0,1 /
43 2-3 S -0,1 -0,1 / -16,6 -16,6 -0,02%
46 3 L -16,4 -16,4 0,04% -16,4 -16,4 -0,02%
52 3 M -16,2 -16,2 0,12% -16,2 -16,2 0,12%
61 3 S -16,6 -16,6 -0,01% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 40 / 242
3.3.2 Live loads
3.3.2.1 Load Model 1 Tandem system TS
This load model, called hereafter LM1 TS, is defined by DIN 101 (2003) 4.3.2. It
corresponds to the circulation of several four wheel tandems on the bridge. This calculation
is based in ACOBRI on the worst possible transverse and longitudinal locations, determined
from the influence lines, for each section and for each studied solicitation - i.e. bending
moment and shear force.
The principles of calculation with ANSYS are different and they can be described by the
following steps:

- Selection of four different configurations of the lanes, as displayed on Figure 13.
- For each configuration of lanes, the tandems are moved along the bridge, a
calculation being carried out for each longitudinal location. The movement of the
tandems is broken up in 100 steps.
- The envelope effects of LM1 TS loads are obtained by considering the envelope
effects of each longitudinal step and each transverse configuration of the lanes.

Figure 13 : Configurations of lanes

Lane 1 Lane 2
RA
Lane 2 Lane 1
RA
Lane 2 Lane 1
RA
RA = Remaining Area
Lane 1 Lane 2
RA
Configuration n1
Configuration n2
Configuration n3
Configuration n4

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 41 / 242

Bending moment

Minimum moment (kNm) Maximum moment (kNm)
1 1 S 0,5 0,0 -3,6 0,0
10 1 M 235,7 235,8 0,06% -697,8 -696,8 -0,14%
16 1 L 374,2 371,0 -0,86% -224,3 -221,0 -1,47%
19 1-2 S 430,3 423,6 -1,55% -67,0 -66,7 -0,43%
23 2 L 205,4 203,5 -0,90% -291,7 -288,4 -1,11%
31 2 M 107,8 107,4 -0,36% -903,8 -903,0 -0,10%
39 2 L 205,4 205,4 0,04% -291,7 -291,6 -0,02%
43 2-3 S 430,3 422,6 -1,79% -67,0 -66,7 -0,41%
46 3 L 374,2 371,4 -0,74% -224,3 -223,0 -0,59%
52 3 M 235,7 235,9 0,08% -697,8 -696,5 -0,19%
61 3 S 0,5 0,0 -3,6 0,0

displayed on the following figures:

Figure 14 : Envelope bending moments LM1 TS Load case Girder n1
-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 42 / 242



-1400
-1200
-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI
-1500
-1000
-500
0
500
1000
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 43 / 242
Shear force
Maximum shear forces:
1 1 S x x x 31,812 31,839 0,08%
10 1 M 70,994 67,558 -4,84% 89,153 85,664 -3,91%
16 1 L 158,9 144,799 -8,87% 161,9 147,724 -8,76%
19 1-2 S 162,84 132,293 -18,76% 15,573 15,489 -0,54%
23 2 L 15,852 15,766 -0,54% 15,89 6,749 -57,53%
31 2 M 67,122 67,284 0,24% 82,738 82,767 0,04%
39 2 L 169,61 169,571 -0,02% 171,73 166,303 -3,16%
43 2-3 S 175,41 162,941 -7,11% 10,205 5,795 -43,21%
46 3 L 8,9964 7,975 -11,35% 6,4328 7,214 12,14%
52 3 M 40,972 37,217 -9,16% 57,678 53,651 -6,98%
61 3 S 153,41 132,297 -13,76% x x x
Minimum shear forces:
1 1 S x x x -153,42 -131,727 -14,14%
10 1 M -57,498 -52,141 -9,32% -40,925 -35,421 -13,45%
16 1 L -6,45 -14,981 132,26% -9,003 -5,225 -41,96%
19 1-2 S -10,186 -5,794 -43,12% -175,4 -155,666 -11,25%
23 2 L -171,8 -171,464 -0,20% -169,61 -169,605 0,00%
31 2 M -82,718 -83,225 0,61% -67,092 -67,854 1,14%
39 2 L -15,889 -6,631 -58,27% -15,85 -15,796 -0,34%
43 2-3 S -15,566 -15,514 -0,33% -162,85 -141,238 -13,27%
46 3 L -161,89 -141,953 -12,32% -158,87 -158,782 -0,06%
52 3 M -88,963 -80,401 -9,62% -70,952 -64,068 -9,70%
61 3 S -31,814 -31,845 0,10% x x x
Some important deviations can be observed, but they are not obtained on extreme values.
After investigation, these differences are due to the differences between methods. With
ANSYS, the maximum values are obtained from the envelope of the values for all the
possible locations of the load. With ACOBRI, the maximum values are obtained by locating
the loads about the lines of influence to obtain the worst effects. But the longitudinal lines of
influence are calculated on a longitudinal 2D model representing only one girder. The
distribution effect of the slab is then not taken into account, which may lead to noticeable
differences.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 44 / 242
3.3.2.2 Load Model 1 UDL system
This load model, called hereafter LM1 UDL, is defined by DIN 101 (2003) 4.3.2. It
corresponds to the effects of a uniformly distributed load. This calculation is based in
ACOBRI on the worst possible transverse and longitudinal locations from influence lines, for
each section and for each studied solicitation - i.e. bending moment and shear force.
following steps:

- Selection of four different transverse configurations of the lanes, as displayed on
Figure 13 see chapter 3.3.2.1.
- For each configuration of lane, calculation of each of the longitudinal configuration, as
displayed in Figure 17.
- The envelope effects of LM1 UDL loads are obtained by considering the envelope
effects of each longitudinal step and each transverse configuration of the lanes.

Bending moment

1 1 S 0,4 0,0 / -1,3 0,0 /
10 1 M 161,8 161,6 -0,07% -308,6 -310,7 0,66%
16 1 L 260,6 263,4 1,10% -100,9 -102,0 1,06%
19 1-2 S 405,8 414,5 2,15% -32,9 -33,5 1,87%
23 2 L 110,4 110,9 0,43% -100,5 -101,8 1,30%
31 2 M 104,3 104,6 0,27% -498,9 -503,1 0,84%
39 2 L 109,6 110,9 1,21% -100,5 -101,8 1,24%
43 2-3 S 407,5 414,5 1,73% -33,2 -33,5 1,04%
46 3 L 260,6 263,4 1,10% -101,0 -102,0 1,00%
52 3 M 161,8 161,6 -0,07% -306,2 -310,7 1,48%
61 3 S 0,4 0,0 / -1,2 0,0 /

A good accuracy of results can be observed. The symmetry of the results is also seen.
For the two others files of girders, results are displayed on the following figures:

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 45 / 242

Figure 17 : Longitudinal configurations for uniformly distributed loads

x
x
x
x
x
x
Configuration n1
Configuration n2
Configuration n3
Configurations n4
Configurations n5
Configurations n6
Configurations n7
Configurations n8
Configurations n9
0 x l1 ; 20 steps
0 x l1 ; 20 steps
0 x l3 ; 20 steps
0 x l3 ; 20 steps
0 x l2 ; 20 steps
0 x l2 ; 20 steps

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 46 / 242

Figure 18 : Envelope bending moments LM1 UDL Load case Girder n1


-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 47 / 242


Shear force


1 1 S x x x 21,97 22,111 0,63%
10 1 M 23,32 38,372 64,55% 34,77 44,967 29,33%
16 1 L 82,50 82,915 0,50% 89,77 89,851 0,08%
19 1-2 S 106,38 107,767 1,30% 10,38 8,008 -22,84%
23 2 L 7,99 7,441 -6,94% 7,868 7,401 -5,93%
31 2 M 28,28 29,722 5,11% 35,08 36,607 4,34%
39 2 L 100,2 101,459 1,26% 108,28 110,017 1,60%
43 2-3 S 126,7 128,572 1,48% 3,938 3,061 -22,27%
46 3 L 3,373 1,102 -67,34% 2,444 1,324 -45,82%
52 3 M 11,80 11,78 -0,15% 16,37 16,797 2,64%
61 3 S 74,10 74,841 1,01% x x x

-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 48 / 242


1 1 S x x x -74,093 -74,843 1,01%
10 1 M -16,338 -16,776 2,68% -11,783 -11,786 0,03%
16 1 L -2,4498 -1,327 -45,83% -3,3786 -1,101 -67,41%
19 1-2 S -3,9357 -3,061 -22,22% -126,67 -128,571 1,50%
23 2 L -108,2 -110,001 1,66% -100,15 -101,441 1,29%
31 2 M -35,077 -36,583 4,29% -28,267 -29,695 5,05%
39 2 L -7,8676 -7,4 -5,94% -7,9974 -7,44 -6,97%
43 2-3 S -10,418 -8,008 -23,13% -106,39 -107,767 1,29%
46 3 L -89,763 -89,852 0,10% -82,467 -82,917 0,55%
52 3 M -34,962 -44,965 28,61% -23,531 -38,37 63,06%
61 3 S -21,974 -22,109 0,61% x x x

Some important deviations can be observed, but they are not obtained on extreme values.
After investigation, the same effect as for LM1 TS is obtained (see chapter 3.3.2.1). The
deviations are due to the difference between the methods.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 49 / 242
3.3.2.3 Uniformly distributed loads on footways
This load model, called hereafter LM Footway, is defined by DIN 101 (2003) 5.3.2.1 (1). It
corresponds to the effects of a uniformly distributed load. This calculation is based in
ACOBRI on the worst possible transverse and longitudinal locations from influence lines, for
each section and for each studied solicitation - i.e. bending moment and shear force.
following steps:

- Only one transverse configuration, as displayed on Figure 21.
- Calculation of each of the longitudinal configurations, as displayed in Figure 17. The
uniform load is applied on the loaded width of the left footway, as defined in
parameters.
- The envelope effects of LM Footway loads are obtained by considering the
envelope effects of each longitudinal step and each transverse configuration of the
lanes.

Figure 21 : Transverse configuration of LM Footway load case

Bending moment

1 1 S 1,1 0,0 / -0,3 0,0 /
10 1 M 102,5 102,5 -0,01% -248,6 -248,6 0,00%
16 1 L 203,6 203,6 -0,01% -84,6 -84,5 -0,09%
19 1-2 S 381,5 386,1 1,21% -22,6 -22,6 -0,02%
23 2 L 91,4 91,4 -0,04% -100,8 -100,8 -0,03%
31 2 M 60,5 60,5 -0,02% -366,4 -366,4 -0,01%
39 2 L 91,4 91,4 -0,03% -100,8 -100,8 -0,04%
43 2-3 S 386,1 386,1 -0,01% -22,6 -22,6 -0,02%
46 3 L 203,6 203,6 -0,01% -84,5 -84,5 -0,07%
52 3 M 102,5 102,5 0,00% -248,6 -248,6 0,00%
61 3 S 1,1 0,0 / -0,3 0,0 /

Loaded footway

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 50 / 242

Figure 22 : Envelope bending moments LM1 Foortway Load case Girder n1

Figure 23 : Envelope bending moments LM1 Footway Load case Girder n2

-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI
-125
-100
-75
-50
-25
0
25
50
75
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 51 / 242

Figure 24 : Envelope bending moments LM1 Footway Load case Girder n3

It has been decided in ACOBRI not to consider the positive part of the transverse line of
influence. It means that when a load which is oriented downwards, leads to an upwards
effect, this load and its effects are neglected. On Figure 24, the ANSYS calculation shows a
maximum absolute value of approximately 35 kNm, to be compared to the maximum
absolute value obtained in girder n1 (Figure 22) o f approximately 380 kNm. The conclusion
is that the approximation done in ACOBRI is appropriate.

Figure 25 : Girder n3 Transverse line of influen ce

-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI
Transverse line of influence for
Girder n3
girder P3
Loaded width of footway

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 52 / 242

Shear force


1 1 S x x x 14,473 14,474 0,01%
10 1 M 17,993 35,553 97,59% 26,661 41,155 54,36%
16 1 L 80,498 81,072 0,71% 93,842 93,562 -0,30%
19 1-2 S 124,33 126,225 1,52% 5,7039 5,7 -0,07%
23 2 L 6,6214 6,68 0,89% 8,0686 8,071 0,03%
31 2 M 30,794 32,173 4,48% 35,578 36,944 3,84%
39 2 L 91,356 91,339 -0,02% 104,87 104,874 0,00%
43 2-3 S 140,68 140,609 -0,05% 2,3475 2,347 -0,02%
46 3 L 1,8295 0,874 -52,23% 1,8865 1,788 -5,22%
52 3 M 15,535 15,727 1,24% 18,88 19,424 2,88%
61 3 S 76,933 76,913 -0,03% x x x


1 1 S x x x -76,931 -76,917 -0,02%
10 1 M -18,84 -19,414 3,05% -15,526 -15,726 1,29%
16 1 L -1,8784 -1,789 -4,76% -1,8296 -0,873 -52,28%
19 1-2 S -2,3464 -2,347 0,03% -131,86 -140,61 6,64%
23 2 L -104,75 -104,891 0,13% -91,338 -91,345 0,01%
31 2 M -35,581 -36,94 3,82% -30,796 -32,167 4,45%
39 2 L -8,0674 -8,071 0,04% -6,6296 -6,681 0,78%
43 2-3 S -5,7 -5,7 0,00% -126,24 -126,225 -0,01%
46 3 L -94,527 -93,563 -1,02% -80,936 -81,074 0,17%
52 3 M -26,827 -41,156 53,41% -17,984 -35,553 97,69%
61 3 S -14,473 -14,471 -0,01% x x x

Some important deviations can be observed, but they are obtained for non significant values.
As for other live loads, these deviations are due to the differences of methods between both
calculations.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 53 / 242
3.3.2.4 Fatigue Load Model 3 on left slow lane
This load model, called hereafter LMF 3, is defined by DIN 101 (2003) 4.6.4. It corresponds
to the effects of the circulation of a four axles lorry. In both cases, calculation with ACOBRI
and with ANSYS, the lorry is moved on the slow lane in several steps.
following points:

- Only one transverse configuration, as displayed on Figure 26.
- The lorry is moved along the bridge, a calculation being carried out for each
longitudinal location. The movement of the lorry is broken up in 100 steps.
- The envelope effects of LMF 3 loads are obtained by considering the envelope
effects of each longitudinal step and for the transverse configuration of the lane.

Figure 26 : Transverse configuration of LMF 3 load case

Bending moment

1 1 S 0,1 0,0 / -1,5 -0,8 /
10 1 M 162,0 162,0 -0,02% -345,0 -344,5 -0,16%
16 1 L 274,5 274,1 -0,15% -123,0 -122,8 -0,17%
19 1-2 S 326,5 326,3 -0,07% -42,0 -42,0 0,02%
23 2 L 132,5 132,9 0,29% -154,5 -151,9 -1,70%
31 2 M 63,8 63,8 -0,06% -523,0 -522,5 -0,10%
39 2 L 132,5 132,9 0,31% -154,5 -151,9 -1,66%
43 2-3 S 326,5 326,3 -0,06% -42,0 -42,0 0,00%
46 3 L 274,5 274,1 -0,15% -123,0 -122,6 -0,30%
52 3 M 162,0 162,0 -0,03% -345,0 -344,4 -0,17%
61 3 S 0,1 0,2 / -1,5 -0,8 /


Left slow lane

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 54 / 242

Figure 27 : Envelope bending moments LMF 3 on left slow lane Girder n1


-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI
-600
-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 55 / 242


-250
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
150
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 56 / 242
3.3.2.5 Fatigue Load Model 3 on right slow lane
The same principles are used as in the former chapter, with the transverse configuration of
the slow lane displayed on Figure 30.

Figure 30 : Transverse configuration of LMF 3 load case

Bending moment

1 1 S 0,5 0,2 / -1,3 -0,6 /
10 1 M 33,7 33,7 -0,07% -32,4 -32,3 -0,51%
16 1 L 20,0 20,0 0,04% -5,6 -5,6 -0,08%
19 1-2 S 3,5 3,5 0,26% -9,1 -9,1 0,25%
23 2 L 10,2 10,0 -1,50% -2,2 -2,3 0,21%
31 2 M 14,8 14,8 0,06% -55,9 -55,9 0,00%
39 2 L 10,2 10,0 -1,68% -2,2 -2,3 0,04%
43 2-3 S 3,5 3,5 -0,15% -9,1 -9,1 0,24%
46 3 L 20,0 20,0 0,00% -5,6 -5,6 -0,08%
52 3 M 33,7 33,6 -0,12% -32,4 -32,3 -0,50%
61 3 S 0,5 0,2 / -1,3 -0,6 /

symmetry of the results is also seen. For the two others files of girders, results are displayed
on the following figures:

Right slow lane

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 57 / 242

Figure 31 : Envelope bending moments LMF 3 on right slow lane Girder n1


-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
0 10 20 30 40 50
ANSYS
ACOBRI
Moments (kNm)

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 58 / 242


-1000
-800
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 10 20 30 40 50
Moments (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 59 / 242
3.4 Validation of verifications
All verifications carried out by ACOBRI can be checked either in the calculation sheet or in
the post processing module. The pieces of information given in each case are:

- in the calculation sheet (CS), a table gives the design value, the limit value and the
ratio of the limit value divided by the design value (in absolute values).
- in the post processing module (PP), curves can be displayed to represent the ratio in
each section.

3.4.1 Combinations
3.4.1.1 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations will be used hereafter to represent the load cases.

Abbreviation Load case
W Weight
SS Superstructure
SS(+) Superstructure +
EQ Equipment
TK(+) Thermal loads with +T
TK(-) Thermal loads with T
Dead Loads
SH Shrinkage of concrete
UDL Load Model 1 System UDL
TS Load Model 1 Tandem System TS Live Loads
FW Load model of Footways
F3L Fatigue Load Model 3 on left slow lane
Fatigue Loads
F3R Fatigue Load Model 3 on right slow lane

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 60 / 242
3.4.1.2 Serviceability limit states
The combinations to be considered for Serviceability Limit States are given in the following
tables:

Characteristic combinations

The general relations of characteristics combinations are given below:

G + Q +
0
TK
G + TK +
0
Q
G + Q +
0
TK + SH
G + TK +
0
Q + SH

With:

G = W + SS + EQ or G = W + SS(+) + EQ
TK = TK(+) or TK = TK(-)
Q = UDL + TS + 0.5 FW

0
: Factor for combination value

The values of
0
considered for this bridge are:

Load Case
0

UDL 0.40
TS 0.75
TK 0.60

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 61 / 242
So the characteristic combinations considered in the document are:

Index Combination
SLS-1 W + SS(+) + EQ + UDL + TS + 0.5 FW + 0.6 TK(+)
SLS-2 W + SS + EQ + UDL + TS + 0.5 FW + 0.6 TK(+)
SLS-3 W + SS(+) + EQ + UDL + TS + 0.5 FW + 0.6 TK(-)
SLS-4 W + SS + EQ + UDL + TS + 0.5 FW + 0.6 TK(-)
SLS-5 W + SS(+) + EQ + TK(+) + 0.40 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW
SLS-6 W + SS + EQ + TK(+) + 0.40 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW
SLS-7 W + SS(+) + EQ + TK(-) + 0.40 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW
SLS-8 W + SS + EQ + TK(-) + 0.40 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW
SLS-9 W + SS(+) + EQ + UDL + TS + 0.5 FW + 0.6 TK(+) + SH
SLS-10 W + SS + EQ + UDL + TS + 0.5 FW + 0.6 TK(+) + SH
SLS-11 W + SS(+) + EQ + UDL + TS + 0.5 FW + 0.6 TK(-) + SH
SLS-12 W + SS + EQ + UDL + TS + 0.5 FW + 0.6 TK(-) + SH
SLS-13 W + SS(+) + EQ + TK(+) + 0.40 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + SH
SLS-14 W + SS + EQ + TK(+) + 0.40 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + SH
SLS-15 W + SS(+) + EQ + TK(-) + 0.40 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + SH
SLS-16 W + SS + EQ + TK(-) + 0.40 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + SH

Frequent combinations

The general relations of frequent combinations are given below:

G +
1
Q +
2
TK
G +
1
Q +
2
TK + SH

With:

0
,
1
: Factors for combination value

The values of
1
and
2
considered for this bridge are:

Load Case
1

2

UDL 0.40 0.20
TS 0.75 0.20
TK 0.60 0.50

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 62 / 242
So the frequent combinations considered in the document are:

Index Combination
SLS-17 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.4 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + 0.5 TK(+)
SLS-18 W + SS + EQ + 0.4 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + 0.5 TK(+)
SLS-19 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.4 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + 0.5 TK(-)
SLS-20 W + SS + EQ + 0.4 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + 0.5 TK(-)
SLS-21 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.4 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + 0.5 TK(+) + SH
SLS-22 W + SS + EQ + 0.4 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + 0.5 TK(+) + SH
SLS-23 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.4 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + 0.5 TK(-) + SH
SLS-24 W + SS + EQ + 0.4 UDL + 0.75 TS + 0.2 FW + 0.5 TK(-) + SH

Quasi-permanent combinations

The general relations of quasi-permanent combinations are given below:

G +
2
Q
G +
2
TK
G +
2
Q + SH
G +
2
TK + SH

So the quasi-permanent combinations considered in the document are:

Index Combination
SLS-25 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.2 UDL + 0.2 TS
SLS-26 W + SS + EQ + 0.2 UDL + 0.2 TS
SLS-27 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.5 TK(+)
SLS-28 W + SS + EQ + 0.5 TK(+)
SLS-29 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.5 TK(-)
SLS-30 W + SS + EQ + 0.5 TK(-)
SLS-31 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.2 UDL + 0.2 TS + SH
SLS-32 W + SS + EQ + 0.2 UDL + 0.2 TS + SH
SLS-33 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.5 TK(+) + SH
SLS-34 W + SS + EQ + 0.5 TK(+) + SH
SLS-35 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.5 TK(-) + SH
SLS-36 W + SS + EQ + 0.5 TK(-) + SH

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 63 / 242
Non-frequent combinations

The general relations of non-frequent combinations are given below:

G +
1
Q +
1
TK
G +
1
Q +
1
TK + SH

With:

1
: Factor for combination value. Its value for this case is:

Load Case
1

UDL 0.80
TS 0.80

So the non-frequent combinations considered in the document are:

Index Combination
SLS-37 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.8 UDL + 0.8 TS + 0.4 FW + 0.6 TK(+)
SLS-38 W + SS + EQ + 0.8 UDL + 0.8 TS + 0.4 FW + 0.6 TK(+)
SLS-39 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.8 UDL + 0.8 TS + 0.4 FW + 0.6 TK(-)
SLS-40 W + SS + EQ + 0.8 UDL + 0.8 TS + 0.4 FW + 0.6 TK(-)
SLS-41 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.8 UDL + 0.8 TS + 0.4 FW + 0.6 TK(+) + SH
SLS-42 W + SS + EQ + 0.8 UDL + 0.8 TS + 0.4 FW + 0.6 TK(+) + SH
SLS-43 W + SS(+) + EQ + 0.8 UDL + 0.8 TS + 0.4 FW + 0.6 TK(-) + SH
SLS-44 W + SS + EQ + 0.8 UDL + 0.8 TS + 0.4 FW + 0.6 TK(-) + SH

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 64 / 242
3.4.1.3 Ultimate limit states

G
G +
Q
Q
G
G +
Q
TK +
Q

0
Q
G
G +
Q
Q +
G,SH
SH
G
G +
Q
Q +
Q

0
Q +
G,SH
SH

With:

0
: Factors for combination value
G
,
Q
,
G,SH
: Partial factors

The values of
0
considered for this bridge have been given in the previous chapter.
The values of partial factors used for this bridge are:

G
=
GSH
= 1.35
Q
= 1.50

Index Combination
ULS-1 1.35 W + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 UDL + 1.5 TS + 0.75 FW
ULS-2 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 UDL + 1.5 TS + 0.75 FW
ULS-3 1.35 W + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TK(+) + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW
ULS-4 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TK(+) + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW
ULS-5 1.35 W + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TK(-) + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW
ULS-6 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TK(-) + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW
ULS-7 1.35 W + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 UDL + 1.5 TS + 0.75 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-8 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 UDL + 1.5 TS + 0.75 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-9 1.35 W + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TK(+) + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-10 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TK(+) + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-11 1.35 W + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TK(-) + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-12 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TK(-) + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW + 1.35 SH

3.4.1.4 Fatigue limit states

Index Combination
FLS-1 W + SS(+) + EQ + Q
Fat

FLS-2 W + SS + EQ + Q
Fat

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 65 / 242
3.4.2 Section characteristics
3.4.2.1 Effective widths of concrete for verifications
The theoretical expression for the effective width of the slab to be considered for the
verifications is given in the following figure.

Figure 34 : Effective width of concrete for verifications

The spacing b
0
between connectors is not known at this state of the study. So an arbitrary
value is chosen with the following formula:

b
0
= b
f
2.5 d
0
= 245 mm

With:

b
f
: Flange width; here b
f
= 300 mm for all line of girders
d
0
: Connectors diameter d
0
= 22 mm

The geometric width of concrete available for each line of girders can then be calculated:

Girders P1 P2 P3
b
1
(mm) 1627 1627 1627
b
2
(mm) 1627 1627 1127

Figure 35 : Geometric width of concrete for verifications

intermediate
pier
abutment
b
1
b
1

b
1
b
2
b
2

P1
P2 P3
b
2

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 66 / 242
For Spans 1 and 3:

Length: L
1
= 15 m
So: L
e
= 0.85 L
1
= 12.75 m and L
e
/ 8 = 1594 mm
So:
i
= 0.55 + 0.025 L
e
/ b
i

i
= 0.746 for b
i
= 1627 mm
i
= 0.833 for b
i
= 1127 mm

The values of effective width at mid-span (b
eff,1
) and at abutments (b
eff,0
) are then given
in the following table:

P1 P2 P3
b
eff,0
(mm) 2623 2623 2373
b
eff,1
(mm) 3433 3433 2966

Examples: for P1, b
eff,0
= 245 + 2 x 0.746 x 1594 = 2623 mm
for P3, b
eff,0
= 245 + 0.746 x 1594 + 0.833 x 1127 = 2373 mm

For Span 2:

Length: L
2
= 22 m
So: L
e
= 0.70 L
2
= 15.4 m and L
e
/ 8 = 1925 mm

The values of effective width at mid-span (b
eff,1
) are then given in the following table:

P1 P2 P3
b
eff,1
(mm) 3500 3500 3000

For intermediate piers:

L
e
= 0.25 (L
1
+ L
2
) = 9.25 m
L
e
/ 8 = 1156 mm

The values of effective width at piers (b
eff,2
) are then given in the following table:

P1 P2 P3
b
eff,2
(mm) 2557 2557 2528

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 67 / 242

ACOBRI values:

With the previous calculations, the theoretical effective widths can be calculated and
compared to the ACOBRI values. The results are given in the following table:

P1 P2 P3
Section Span Type d (m) Theo. ACOBRI Theo. ACOBRI Theo. ACOBRI
1 1 S 0 2.62 2.62 2.62 2.62 2.37 2.37
10 1 M 7.5 3.43 3.43 3.43 3.43 2.97 2.97
16 1 L 2.25 3.08 3.08 3.08 3.08 2.79 2.79
19 1-2 S 0 2.56 2.56 2.56 2.56 2.53 2.53
23 2 L 3.30 3.12 3.12 3.12 3.12 2.81 2.81
31 2 M 11 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.00 3.00
39 2 L 3.30 3.12 3.12 3.12 3.12 2.81 2.81
43 2-3 S 0 2.56 2.56 2.56 2.56 2.53 2.53
46 3 L 2.25 3.08 3.08 3.08 3.08 2.79 2.79
52 3 M 7.5 3.43 3.43 3.43 3.43 2.97 2.97
61 3 S 0 2.62 2.62 2.62 2.62 2.37 2.37
(*): d = distance to the nearest support.

Example of calculation: effective width of concrete for Section 16 and girder P1:

Distance to the closest support: d = 2.25 m
L
1
/ 4 = 3.75 m

So: l
e
= b
eff,2
+ (b
eff,1
-b
eff,2
)x2.25/3.75 = 3.083 m

3.4.2.2 Elastic Modulus
Considering the effective width of concrete, the modular ratio and the different states of the
concrete, the location of elastic neutral axis and the elastic modulus are calculated for:

- the upper and lower flanges (W
top
and W
bot
)
- the upper side of concrete slab when concrete is not cracked (W
slab
)
- the upper layer of reinforcement when concrete is cracked (W
rein
).

The location of the elastic neutral axis (z
el
) is given about the lower fibre of the steel section.
Because the huge number of values to be controlled, the verification is carried out only for
sections n10 and 19 and for girders P1 and P2. The elastic moduli are displayed as positive
values for fibres under the neutral axis and as negative values for fibres above the neutral
axis.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 68 / 242
Girder P1 Section 10

Effective width of concrete: l
e
= 3.433 m
Steel section: HE800A

During the pouring of concrete:

Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 395 395
W
top
(cm
3
) -7682 -7682
W
bot
(cm
3
) 7682 7682

If the slab is not cracked:

Theoretical ACOBRI
n
eq
16.16 15.98 6.31 16.16 15.98 6.31
z
el
(mm) 749 750 839 749 750 839
W
top
(cm
3
) -211812 -219382 218770 -211600 -219191 218796
W
bot
(cm
3
) 11675 11686 12696 11675 11686 12696
W
slab
(cm
3
) -453821 -451898 -303568 -453813 -451884 -303536

If the slab is cracked:

Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 543 543
W
top
(cm
3
) -22186 -22184
W
bot
(cm
3
) 10111 10111
W
rein
(cm
3
) -11496 -11495

All deviations are less than 1 %.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 69 / 242


e
= 2.557 m


Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 395 395
W
top
(cm
3
) 7682 7682
W
bot
(cm
3
) -7682 -7682


Theoretical ACOBRI
n
eq
16.16 15.98 6.31 16.16 15.98 6.31
z
el
(mm) 712 714 815 713 714 815
W
top
(cm
3
) -104639 -106921 399052 -106492 -106935 398729
W
bot
(cm
3
) 11374 11385 12346 11374 11386 12347
W
slab
(cm
3
) -376937 -375404 -259458 -377009 -375469 -259480


Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 513 513
W
top
(cm
3
) -18001 -18004
W
bot
(cm
3
) 9725 9726
W
rein
(cm
3
) -9837 -9838

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 70 / 242


e
= 3.433 m
Steel section: HE700B


Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 350 350
W
top
(cm
3
) -7339 -7340
W
bot
(cm
3
) 7339 7340


Theoretical ACOBRI
n
eq
16.16 15.98 6.31 16.16 15.98 6.31
z
el
(mm) 666 667 751 666 667 751
W
top
(cm
3
) -224870 -234032 183706 -224614 -233799 183725
W
bot
(cm
3
) 11431 11444 12544 11431 11443 12544
W
slab
(cm
3
) -404974 -403264 -27195 -404964 -403248 -271887


Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 479 479
W
top
(cm
3
) -21236 -21233
W
bot
(cm
3
) 9797 9797
W
rein
(cm
3
) -10406 -10405

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 71 / 242


e
= 2.557 m
Steel section: HE700B


Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 350 350
W
top
(cm
3
) -7339 -7340
W
bot
(cm
3
) 7339 7340


Theoretical ACOBRI
n
eq
16.16 15.98 6.31 16.16 15.98 6.31
z
el
(mm) 633 634 729 632 634 729
W
top
(cm
3
) -103996 -106410 306706 -104000 -106424 306504
W
bot
(cm
3
) 11108 11121 12160 11108 11121 12161
W
slab
(cm
3
) -336331 -334962 -231979 -336395 -335020 -231999


Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 453 453
W
top
(cm
3
) -17199 -17201
W
bot
(cm
3
) 9399 9400
W
rein
(cm
3
) -8912 -8913

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 72 / 242
3.4.2.3 Positive plastic moment
It is to be noted that a positive moment tends to compress the concrete slab (see chapter
2.1).
Considering the effective widths of the slab, as determined in chapter 3.4.2.1, the plastic
characteristics of the sections are calculated: the class of the section, the plastic moment,
the location of the neutral axis and factor.
The material properties used are:
- concrete: 0.85 f
ck
/
c
= 19.83 MPa
- steel: f
y
/
M0
= 440 MPa
with:
f
ck
: Characteristic value of the cylinder compressive strength of concrete at 28
days; for this case, f
ck
= 35 MPa.
f
y
: Yield strength of the steel of girders. f
y
= 440 MPa
c
: Partial factor for concrete;
c
= 1.5
M0
: Partial factor for steel;
M0
= 1.0

Class of sections under positive moment:

Under positive moment, the lower flange is in tension and the upper flange either in
tension or in compression. But the upper flange is held by the slab, so that if under
compression, it can be considered as a class 1. The class of the section under positive
moment is then only function of the class of the web for this moment.
And considering the location of plastic neutral axis (see hereafter) which is always
located above the web, the all web is always in the tension part. So its class is 1.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 73 / 242

M
PlRd
, z
PNE
, :

M
PlRd
is the positive plastic moment, z
PNE
the location the plastic neutral axis about the
bottom fibre of the section and the factor calculated from DIN 104 4.4.1.2 to take into
account the effect of the location of the neutral plastic axis. The results of both
theoretical and ACOBRI calculations are presented in the following table for the girder
n1. Theoretical values are obtained from an altern ative EXCEL application for
composite sections.

M
PlRd
(kNm) z
PNE
(mm)
Section Span Type Theo. ACOBRI Theo. ACOBRI Theo. ACOBRI
1 1 S 6845.5 6843 818.2 818.2 0.95 0.953
10 1 M 7204.4 7202 875.3 875.3 0.99 0.985
16 1 L 7072.5 7070 854.3 854.3 0.97 0.974
19 1-2 S 6806.9 6804 812.1 812.1 0.95 0.950
23 2 L 7089.3 7086 857.0 857.0 0.98 0.975
31 2 M 7226.8 7224 878.8 878.8 0.99 0.987
39 2 L 7089.3 7086 857.0 857.0 0.98 0.975
43 2-3 S 6806.9 6804 812.1 812.1 0.95 0.950
46 3 L 7072.5 7070 854.3 854.3 0.97 0.974
52 3 M 7204.4 7202 875.3 875.3 0.99 0.985
61 3 S 6845.5 6843 818.2 818.2 0.95 0.953


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 74 / 242
3.4.2.4 Negative plastic moment
It is to be noted that a negative moment tends to put the concrete slab under tension (see
chapter 2.1).
Considering the effective widths of the slab, as determined in chapter 3.4.2.1, the plastic
characteristics of the sections are calculated: the class of the section, the location of the
plastic neutral axis and the plastic moment.
The material properties used are:
- concrete: 0.85 f
ck
/
c
= 19.83 MPa
- steel: f
y
/
M0
= 440 MPa
- reinforcement: f
rein
/
v
= 434,8 MPa
With:
f
ck
ck
= 35 MPa.
f
y
y
= 440 MPa
f
rein
: Yield stress of the reinforcement steel. f
rein
=500 MPa
c
c
= 1.5
M0
M0
= 1.0
v
: Partial factor for reinforcement;
v
= 1.15

Class of sections under negative moment:

Under negative moment, the lower flange is in compression and the web is partially or
totally under compression.
=
440
235
= 0.731
Class of the flanges under compression: (reference DIN 103 Tabelle II-5.3.1 Blatt 3)

HE800A HE700B
b
f
300 300
t
f
28 32
c = b
f
/ 2 150 150
c / t
f
5.35 10 4.69 10
Class 1 1

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 75 / 242
Class of the webs (reference DIN 103 Tabelle II-5.3.1 Blatt 1)

Considering the location of the neutral plastic axis (see hereafter), the web is
under compression.

HE800A HE700B
d 674 582
t
w
15 17
d / t
w
44.9 > 38 34.2 > 38
Class 3 or 4 3 or 4
38 = 27.7
The class of the web is function of the elastic distribution of stresses, which has
to be lead for each section and each combination of loads. Considering an
representative factor for the stress distribution equal to -0.25, the limit between
the two classes 3 and 4 is then: S
3
= 42 / (0.67+0.33 ) = 52.2. For both
sections, the relation is then verified d / t
w
< S
3
.
The class of the web is 3 in all cases.

According to DIN 103 5.3.4, the sections will be considered as Class 2 sections
considering an effective part of the web, defined by the following figure:

Figure 36 : Effective part of the web

20 t
w

20 t
w

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 76 / 242
3.4.2.5 Shear area
The expression of the shear area is given by the following relation:
A
v
= A 2 b t
f
+ (t
w
+ 2 r) t
f

Figure 37 : Shear section

The theoretical value calculated for the three files of girders and the values obtained with
ACOBRI are compared in the following table:

File P1 File P2 File P3
Beam section HE800A HE700B HE800A
Theoretical value (cm
2
) RV 138.83 137.10 138.83
ACOBRI result (cm
2
) CS 138.83 137.10 138.83

Shear section Av
b
r
tw
tf

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 77 / 242
3.4.3 Serviceability limit states
3.4.3.1 Deflection
The deflection of the girders is controlled by verifying in each section the following relation:
f L / 500
where f is the deflection under Load Model 1 load cases (sum of TS and UDL load cases)
and L is the length of the relevant span.
As a result of the calculations carried out with ANSYS for LM1 load cases (see chapters
3.3.2.1and 3.3.2.2), the envelope vertical descending deflections of the girders have been
extracted and combined.
It is to be noted that for ACOBRI process, the envelope deflections is calculated by
considering all the loads location obtained for the maximisation of bending moments or shear
forces. On the contrary, the deflections obtained with ANSYS are the envelope deflection
during the regular circulation of the loads as described in chapters 3.3.2.1and 3.3.2.2.
The results obtained for the checked sections of girder n1 (see Figure 5) are given in the
following table (deflection in cm):

ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span Type f f
lim
f
lim
/ f f f
lim
f
lim
/ f Deviation
1 1 S 0,000 3,0 0,000 0,000 3,0 0,000
10 1 M 0,927 3,0 0,309 0,930 3,0 0,310 0,35%
16 1 L 0,384 3,0 0,128 0,390 3,0 0,128 1,54%
19 1-2 S 0,000 0,0 0,000 0,000 4,4 0,000
23 2 L 0,955 4,4 0,217 0,960 4,4 0,218 0,56%
31 2 M 2,397 4,4 0,545 2,410 4,4 0,547 0,56%
39 2 L 0,955 4,4 0,217 0,960 4,4 0,218 0,56%
43 2-3 S 0,000 0,0 0,000 0,000 3,0 0,000
46 3 L 0,384 3,0 0,128 0,390 3,0 0,128 1,54%
52 3 M 0,927 3,0 0,309 0,930 3,0 0,310 0,36%
61 3 S 0,000 3,0 0,000 0,000 3,0 0,000

All the deviation are less than 2%.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 78 / 242

Figure 38 : Deflection criteria Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios

0.00
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 79 / 242
3.4.3.2 Minimum reinforcement
According to DIN 104 5.3.2.2, the minimum reinforcement is verified in each section with the
following relation:
s
<
s
eff , ct c d
f k k k

Note: the terminology of the DIN rules is adopted here. But in ACOBRI documents,
the terminology of ENV rules is used, that may be slightly different.
With:
s
: reinforcement factor:
s
= 1.1 %
k
d
= 0.9
k = 0.8
f
ct,eff
: mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete
f
ct,eff
= f
ctm
= 0.3 f
cj
2/3
= 3.21 MPa
k
c
: is a coefficient which takes account of the stress distribution within the section
immediately prior to cracking and is given by:
k
c
=
0
c
z 2
h
1
1
+
+ 0.3 1.0
h
c
: is the thickness of the concrete flange, excluding any haunch or ribs.
z
0
: is the vertical distance between the centroids of the un-cracked concrete
flange and the uncracked composite section, calculated using the modular
ratio n
eq
for short-term loading (here n
eq
= 6.31).
s
: is the maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement immediately after
cracking. The value of
s
is given by table 4.120 from a maximum bar
diameter d
s
* = 20 mm, for w
k
= 2 mm. So
s
= 192 MPa.
Note: In ENV 1994-2 5.3.2.2,
s
can be increased by a factor. This possibility is no
more available neither in DIN nor in EN rules.
The ratio can then be defined by the following expression:
=
s s
eff , ct c d
f k k k

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 80 / 242
The ratios obtained for the checked sections of girder n1 (see Figure 5) are given in the
following table:

ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span Type ratio ratio Deviation
1 1 S 0,81 0,81 0,04%
10 1 M 0,76 0,76 -0,02%
16 1 L 0,78 0,78 0,05%
19 1-2 S 0,82 0,82 0,00%
23 2 L 0,78 0,78 0,03%
31 2 M 0,75 0,75 0,01%
39 2 L 0,78 0,78 0,03%
43 2-3 S 0,82 0,82 0,00%
46 3 L 0,78 0,78 0,05%
52 3 M 0,76 0,76 -0,02%
61 3 S 0,81 0,81 0,04%


Figure 39 : Minimum reinforcement criteria Comparison of EXCEL and ACOBRI ratios

0,72
0,74
0,76
0,78
0,80
0,82
0,84
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 EXCEL
P2 EXCEL
P3 EXCEL
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 81 / 242
3.4.3.3 Compression stresses in concrete
For all the longitudinal stresses calculated hereafter (compression in concrete in this chapter,
tension in reinforcement in chapter 3.4.3.3 and normal stresses in steel girders in chapter
3.4.3.5), the state of concrete needs to be known. It means that for each combination and for
each section, the normal stress in the slab will be calculated with the elastic modulus
determined with the assumption of a non cracked concrete. If this normal stresses is a
compression stress, the assumption is correct, so that other stresses in the section and for
the considered combination can be calculated with the same assumption. But if the normal
stress is a tension stress, the assumption is not verified, so that the concrete has to be
considered as cracked and the other normal stresses will be calculated with the elastic
modulus for cracked concrete.
The SLS combinations considered for the calculations of normal stresses are:
- characteristic combinations for normal stresses in steel girders,
- non frequent combinations for compression in concrete, tension in reinforcement
(cracked concrete).
The compression in the concrete is controlled by verifying in each section the following
relation:
concrete
< 0.6 f
ck

With:
concrete
: compressive stress in the upper fibre of the concrete slab
f
ck
: limit of compressive strength in concrete.
For the present case, f
ck
= 35 MPa.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 82 / 242
following table (stresses in MPa): (Ratio
con
=
concrete
/ (0.6 f
ck
))
On the left On the right
ANSYS ACOBRI ANSYS ACOBRI
Sec
tion
Spa
n
Ty
pe
con

con

concret

con
(%)
con

con

concret

con
(%)
1 1 S x x x x x 0,46 0,022 0,45 0,021 -4,54
10 1 M 3,59 0,171 3,59 0,171 0,10 3,59 0,171 3,59 0,171 0,10
16 1 L 0,76 0,036 0,75 0,036 0,03 0,76 0,036 0,75 0,036 0,03
19 1-2 S 0,00 0,000 0,00 0,000 0,00 0,000 0,00 0,000
23 2 L 1,46 0,070 1,46 0,069 -0,73 1,46 0,070 1,45 0,069 -0,73
31 2 M 5,48 0,261 5,49 0,262 0,31 5,48 0,261 5,49 0,262 0,31
39 2 L 1,46 0,070 1,46 0,070 0,70 1,46 0,070 1,46 0,070 0,70
43 2-3 S 0,00 0,000 0,00 0,000 0,00 0,000 0,00 0,000
46 3 L 0,76 0,036 0,76 0,036 0,01 0,76 0,036 0,75 0,036 0,01
52 3 M 3,58 0,171 3,59 0,171 0,28 3,58 0,171 3,59 0,171 0,28
61 3 S 0,46 0,022 0,45 0,021 -4,49 x x x x x
For all significant values, the deviations are less than 1%.

Figure 40 : Compression in the slab Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios
0,00
0,05
0,10
0,15
0,20
0,25
0,30
0,35
0,40
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 83 / 242
3.4.3.4 Tension stresses in reinforcement
According to DIN 104 5.2 (4), the tension stresses in reinforcement are verified in each
section for non-frequent combinations with the following relations:
rein
< 0.8 f
sk

With:
rein
: tension stresses in the upper layer of reinforcement, which takes into account
the increase due to the effects of tension stiffening of concrete:
rein
=
s0
+
s

s
=
s st
ctm
f 4 , 0

and
st
=
a a
I A
I A

f
ctm
: mean tensile strength in concrete, 3.21 MPa for this case
s
: reinforcement ratio = 0.01 for this case
A, I: Area and second moment of area of the composite section under negative
moment
A
a
, I
a
: Area and second moment of area of the steel section.
f
sk
: yielding stress for reinforcement steel. For this case: f
sk
= 500 MPa
following table (stresses in MPa): (Ratio
rein
=
rein
/ (0.8 f
sk
))

Sec
tion
Spa
n
Ty
pe
rein

rein

rein

rein
(%)
rein

rein

rein

rein
(%)
1 1 S x x x x x 55,5 0,14 55,4 0,14 -0,47%
10 1 M 86,5 0,22 86,4 0,22 -0,07 86,5 0,22 86,4 0,22 -0,07%
16 1 L 173,3 0,43 173,3 0,43 -0,07 173,1 0,43 173,1 0,43 0,04%
19 1-2 S 260,7 0,65 260,9 0,65 0,03 260,9 0,65 261,4 0,65 0,12%
23 2 L 134,6 0,34 134,4 0,34 -0,14 134,6 0,34 134,6 0,34 -0,14%
31 2 M 75,1 0,19 75,1 0,19 0,09 75,1 0,19 75,1 0,19 0,09%
39 2 L 134,5 0,34 134,7 0,34 0,20 134,5 0,34 134,6 0,34 -0,09%
43 2-3 S 261,2 0,65 261,3 0,65 -0,01 261,0 0,65 260,8 0,65 -0,09%
46 3 L 173,1 0,43 173,1 0,43 0,04 173,3 0,43 173,3 0,43 -0,07%
52 3 M 86,5 0,22 86,4 0,22 -0,07 86,5 0,22 86,4 0,22 -0,07%
61 3 S 55,5 0,14 55,4 0,14 -0,47 x x x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 84 / 242

Figure 41 : Tension in reinforcement Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios

3.4.3.5 Normal stresses in steel girders
According to DIN 104 5.2 (6) and DIN 103, the normal stresses in steel girders are verified in
each section for characteristic combinations with the following relations:
top
<
ser , M
y
f
bot
<
ser , M
y
f

With:
top
,
bot
: normal stresses in the upper and the lower flange
M,ser
: partial coefficient. In this case,
M,ser
= 1.00
f
y
: yielding stress.
The thicknesses of the flanges are 28 mm (HE800A) and 32 mm (HE700B). For these
thicknesses and for S460 steel, according to EN 10113-3 used in ACOBRI, the yielding
stress is f
y
= 440 MPa.
0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0,70
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 85 / 242
following tables (stresses in MPa):
Stresses in upper flange (
top
)
Ratio
top
=
top

M,ser
/ f
y

Sec
tion
Spa
n
Ty
pe
top

top

top

top
(%)
top

top

top

top
(%)
1 1 S x x x x x 65,4 0,149 65,37 0,15 0,29
10 1 M 90,46 0,21 90,46 0,21 0,20 90,5 0,206 90,46 0,21 0,20
16 1 L 127,07 0,29 127,07 0,29 0,07 127,0 0,289 126,95 0,29 0,15
19 1-2 S 243,59 0,55 243,77 0,55 0,07 243,7 0,554 244,02 0,56 0,21
23 2 L 66,47 0,15 66,38 0,15 -0,05 66,5 0,151 66,44 0,15 -0,05
31 2 M 135,74 0,31 135,75 0,31 0,16 135,7 0,308 135,76 0,31 0,16
39 2 L 66,43 0,15 66,54 0,15 0,01 66,4 0,151 66,48 0,15 0,01
43 2-3 S 243,91 0,55 243,96 0,55 -0,06 243,8 0,554 243,71 0,55 -0,02
46 3 L 126,97 0,29 126,97 0,29 0,15 127,1 0,289 127,09 0,29 0,07
52 3 M 90,46 0,21 90,46 0,21 0,19 90,5 0,206 90,46 0,21 0,19
61 3 S 65,37 0,15 65,37 0,15 0,29 x x x x x

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 86 / 242

Figure 42 : Normal stresses in upper flange Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios

Stresses in lower flange (
bot
)
Ratio
bot
=
bot

M,ser
/ f
y

Sec
tion
Spa
n
Ty
pe
bot

bot

bot

bot
(%)
bot

bot

bot

bot
(%)
1 1 S x x x x x 19,0 0,043 18,74 0,04 -0,31
10 1 M 143,62 0,33 143,72 0,33 0,18 143,6 0,326 143,74 0,33 0,18
16 1 L 203,04 0,46 203,02 0,46 -0,10 202,8 0,461 202,78 0,46 0,00
19 1-2 S 348,47 0,79 348,78 0,79 0,13 348,7 0,792 349,24 0,79 0,20
23 2 L 117,82 0,27 117,63 0,27 -0,29 117,8 0,268 117,76 0,27 0,08
31 2 M 255,23 0,58 255,55 0,58 0,16 255,2 0,580 255,55 0,58 0,16
39 2 L 117,74 0,27 117,95 0,27 0,16 117,7 0,268 117,82 0,27 0,16
43 2-3 S 349,07 0,79 349,14 0,79 -0,04 348,9 0,793 348,68 0,79 -0,12
46 3 L 202,84 0,46 202,83 0,46 0,00 203,0 0,461 203,06 0,46 0,12
52 3 M 143,42 0,33 143,71 0,33 0,32 143,4 0,326 143,69 0,33 0,32
61 3 S 18,98 0,04 18,74 0,04 -0,29 x x x x x
0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 87 / 242

Figure 43 : Normal stresses in lower flange Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios

3.4.3.6 Shear of steel girders
According to DIN 104 5.2 (6) and DIN 103, the shear stresses in steel girders are verified in
each section for characteristic combinations with the following relation:
Ed
<
ser , M
y
3
f

With:
Ed
: Shear stress in steel girder
M,ser
M,ser
= 1.00
f
y
: yielding stress.
The thicknesses of the flanges are 28 mm (HE800A) and 32 mm (HE700B). For these
thicknesses and for S460 steel, according to EN 10113-3 used in ACOBRI, the yielding
stress is f
y
= 440 MPa.
The associated ratio is =
Ed
/ (f
y
/ 3
M,Ser
)
0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0,70
0,80
0,90
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 88 / 242
following tables:

ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span Type (%)
1R 1 S 0,137 0,131 -4,51%
16L 1 L 0,179 0,175 -2,01%
16R 1 L 0,194 0,190 -2,00%
19L 1 S 0,225 0,217 -3,67%
19R 2 S 0,236 0,232 -1,49%
23L 2 L 0,195 0,195 0,14%
23R 2 L 0,178 0,179 0,35%
39L 2 L 0,178 0,179 0,33%
39R 2 L 0,195 0,194 -0,40%
43L 2 S 0,237 0,234 -1,30%
43R 3 S 0,226 0,220 -2,46%
46L 3 L 0,194 0,188 -3,08%
46R 3 L 0,179 0,179 0,24%
61L 3 S 0,137 0,131 -4,51%

3.4.3.7 Interaction shear / normal stresses
According to DIN 104 5.2 (6) and DIN 103, the interaction of shear and normal stresses in
steel girders is verified in each section for characteristic combinations with the following
relations:
VM,t
<
ser , M
y
f
and
VM,b
<
ser , M
y
f

With:
VM,t
,
bVM,b
: Von Mises stresses calculated at the top and the bottom fibres of the
web.
M,ser
M,ser
= 1.00
f
y
: yielding stress. f
y
= 440 MPa
The Von Mises stresses are calculated with the following relation, where is the normal
stress and the shear stress:
VM
=
2 2
3 +
The Von Mises stresses are calculated at the most unfavourable place of interaction, ie the
top and the bottom fibres of the web.
For live loads, couples of envelope moments and concomitant shear forces have to be
considered as well as couple of envelope shear forces and concomitant moments. Because

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 89 / 242
this can not be automatically operated from the ANSYS results, this verification will be
checked from the ACOBRI values (forces and moments), for the section at the first
intermediate pier, of the second girder.
For this section, the forces and moments calculated by ACOBRI are:

Load case M (kNm) V(kN)
Weight (W) -930.3 243.9
Superstructure (SS) -272.2 73.9
Superstructure + (SSP) -321.1 89.9
Equipment (EQ) 4.86 -4.72
Thermal loads + T (THP) (1) 230.7 -14.8
Thermal loads - T (THM) (1) -230.7 14.8
Shrinkage (SH) (1) -410.6 28.3
Live loads UDL (UDL) -505.6 180.7
Live loads TS (TS) -525.8 69.8
M envelope
V concomitant
Live footways (FW) -62.6 5.98
Live loads UDL (UDL) -503.9 180.7
Live loads TS (TS) -206.4 385.8
M envelope
V concomitant
Live footways (FW) -62.43 5.98
(1): hyperstatic moment

Figure 44 : HEB700 dimensions

ht = 360
bf = 300
rc = 18
tf = 32.0
tw = 17.0
VM,b
VM,t

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 90 / 242
The second moment of area I and the location the neutral axis z
ANE
are given by ACOBRI.
From these values, the elastic modulus of the top and bottom fibres of the web can be
calculated, with the relations:
W
top
= I / (ht tf z
ANE
)
W
bot
= I / (tf z
ANE
)
The values obtained are (considering an effective of concrete equal to 2.56 m and a cracked
concrete):

Construction phase Other loads
Inertia (cm
4
) 256887 425466
z
ANE
(cm) 35.00 45.27
W
top
(cm
3
) 8078,2 19756,9
W
bot
(cm
3
) -8078,2 -10114,4

The shear area considered is Av = 137.1 cm
2
.
The normal stresses, the shear stresses and then the Von Mises stresses can be calculated,
for each of the characteristic combination. The envelope values obtained are:

M envelope
V concomitant
V envelope
M concomitant
Top fibre 226.7 229.3
Bottom fibre 315.6 298.4

The envelope value to be considered for the verification is then 315.6 MPa, compared to the
limit f
y
/
Mser
= 440 MPa.
The value calculated by ACOBRI is
VMmax
= 315.6 for a limit equal to 440 MPa.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 91 / 242
3.4.4 Ultimate limit states
3.4.4.1 Shear force
The resistance to shear force under ULS combinations is verified in each section by the
following relation:
V
Ed
< V
plRd

With:
V
Ed
: Shear force in the section under the considered combination of load cases.
V
plRd
: Resistant shear force, given by the relation:
V
plRd
=
3
f A
0 M
y v

A
v
: Shear section as calculated in 3.4.2.4.
M0
: Partial factor for resistance of cross-sections;
M0
= 1.0
The associated ratio will be:
=
plRd
Ed
V
V

following tables (Moments in kNm):
ANSYS ACOBRI
1R 1 S 0,193 0,184 -4,52%
16L 1 L 0,249 0,244 -2,13%
16R 1 L 0,271 0,265 -2,10%
19L 1 S 0,314 0,302 -3,94%
19R 2 S 0,334 0,328 -1,67%
23L 2 L 0,277 0,278 0,36%
23R 2 L 0,254 0,255 0,31%
39L 2 L 0,254 0,255 0,29%
39R 2 L 0,277 0,275 -0,75%
43L 2 S 0,336 0,331 -1,45%
43R 3 S 0,315 0,306 -2,80%
46L 3 L 0,271 0,262 -3,26%
46R 3 L 0,249 0,25 0,28%
61L 3 S 0,193 0,184 -4,52%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 92 / 242
The deviations obtained are the results of the deviations obtained in the calculation of shear
forces under live loads and explained before (see chapter 3.3.2).

0,00
0,05
0,10
0,15
0,20
0,25
0,30
0,35
0,40
0,45
0,0 10,0 20,0 30,0 40,0 50,0
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Figure 45 : Shear force
Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios for ULS Combinations

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 93 / 242
3.4.4.2 Positive bending moment
It has been proven in 3.4.2.3 that all sections are class 1 under a positive moment. So
according to DIN 104 4.4.1, the resistance to positive bending moment is verified in each
section for ULS combinations with the following relations:
M
Ed
< M
PlRd

With:
M
Ed
: Positive bending moment in the section under the considered combination of
load cases.
M
PlRd
: Positive resistant bending moment (considering a non cracked concrete under
compression) as calculated in 3.4.2.3.
: Factor calculated according to DIN 104 4.4.1.2 (4) to take into account the
location of the plastic neutral axis. See chapter 3.4.2.3.
=
PlRd
Ed
M
M

ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span Type Cn Cn (%)
1 1 S 0,185 11 0.18 11 -0,16%
10 1 M 0,410 7 0.41 7 0,11%
16 1 L 0,000 8 0.01 8
19 1-2 S 0,000 / 0 /
23L 2 L 0,103 8 0.10 8 -0,31%
23R 2 L 0.063 2 0.06 2 -0,31%
31 2 M 0,581 7 0.58 7 0,24%
39L 2 L 0.103 8 0.10 8 -0,32%
39R 2 L 0,063 2 0.06 2 1,25%
43 2-3 S 0,000 / 0 /
46 3 L 0,007 8 0.01 8
52 3 M 0,409 7 0.41 7 0,12%
61 3 S 0,185 11 0.18 11 -0,16%
Cn: gives the index of the combination for which t he ratio is maximum

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 94 / 242

Figure 46 : Positive bending moment

0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0,70
0,80
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 95 / 242
3.4.4.3 Negative bending moment
It has been proven in chapter 3.4.2.4 that all sections have class 1 flanges and class 3 webs
under a negative moment. So according to DIN 104 4.4.1, the resistance to negative bending
moment is verified in each section for ULS combinations with the following relation:
M
Ed
< M
PlRd

With:
M
Ed
: Negative bending moment in the section under the considered combination of
load cases.
M
PlRd
: Negative resistant bending moment (considering a cracked concrete with
reinforcement under tension). This plastic moment is calculated with an
effective width of the compressive zone of the web, a length equal to 20 t
w

being taken into account on each part of this zone.
: =
y
f / 235 = 0.731 for this bridge

Figure 47 : Principle of calculation of the negative plastic moment
for a section with a class 3 web
=
PlRd
Ed
' M
M

Effective width of concrete
Plastic neutral axis
20 tw
20 tw
tw
Non effective part of the web
Tension Compression
Plastic stress distribution

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 96 / 242


ANSYS ACOBRI
Sect
ion
Spa
n
Typ
e
M
Ed
M
PlRd
Cn M
Ed
M
PlRd
Cn (%)
1 1 S 319,1 4808 0,066 4 318 4808 0,066 4 -0,56
10 1 M 55,7 4998 0,011 2 55 4998 0,011 2 -1,23
16L 1 L 1983,8 4911 0,404 1 1984 4911 0,404 1 0,02
16R 1 L 1618,4 4911 0,510 7 2503 4911 0,51 7 0,02
19 1-2 S 4202,2 4791 0,877 7 4209 4791 0,8785 7 0,15
23L 2 L 1388,5 4922 0,282 7 1386 4922 0,282 7 -0,05
23R 2 L 771,7 4922 0,157 1 770 4922 0,157 1 0,13
31 2 M 0 5015 0,000 - 0 0 0 1 -
39L 2 L 770,4 4922 0,157 1 773 4922 0,157 1 0,30
39R 2 L 1387,2 4922 0,282 7 1389 4922 0,282 7 0,05
43 2-3 S 4208,2 4791 0,878 7 4207 4791 0,8785 7 0,01
46L 3 L 2504,2 4911 0,510 7 2504 4911 0,51 7 0,02
46R 3 L 1983,8 4911 0,404 1 1984 4911 0,404 1 0,02
52 3 M 55,7 4998 0,011 2 55 4998 0,011 2 -1,24
61 3 S 319,1 4808 0,066 318 4808 0,066 4 -0,56


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 97 / 242

Figure 48 : Negative bending moment

3.4.4.4 Interaction M-V
The interaction between bending moment and shear force should be verified if the following
condition is true:
V
Ed
/ V
plRd
> 0.5
In the case of the studied bridge, this condition is always false (see chapter 3.4.4.1). The
interaction should then not be verified and the associated ratio should then be equal to zero
in each section. This result is well obtained with ACOBRI.

3.4.4.5 Shear buckling
The criteria of shear buckling should be verified if the following condition is true:
b
w
/ t
w
> 72 /
Where:
b
w
, t
w
: Height and thickness of the section
: =
y
f
235
= 0.73
: Coefficient. For DIN rules, = 1.00
So that: 72 / = 52.6
0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0,70
0,80
0,90
1,00
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 98 / 242
For the sections of the studied bridge, the values of the ratio are:
Section Files b
w
(mm) t
w
(mm) b
w
/ t
w
Condition
HE800A P1 and P3 674 15 44.9 False
HE700B P2 582 17 34.2 False

The condition b
w
/ t
w
> 72 / is then always false and the shear buckling criteria should not
be verified. The associated ratios should then be equal to 0. This result is well obtained with
ACOBRI.
An additional validation is carried out in chapter 8.2 for steel section where the condition is
b
w
/ t
w
> 72 / verified.

3.4.4.6 Lateral torsional buckling
For sections of the bridge under negative bending moments, the lateral torsional buckling is
verified with the following relation:
M
Ed
< M
bRd
=
LT
M
PlRd
M0
/
M1

The associated ratio is:
= M
Ed
/ M
bRd

Where:
M
Ed
load cases.
M
PlRd
: Negative resistant bending moment (considering a cracked concrete with
reinforcement under tension). This plastic moment is calculated with an
effective width of the compressive zone of the web, a length equal to 20 t
w

being taken into account on each part of this zone (sections have class 1
flanges and class 3 webs under a negative moment - see chapter 3.4.2.4).
: =
y
f / 235 = 0.731 for this bridge
LT
: Reduction factor for Lateral Torsional Buckling
LT
is a function of
LT
with the following relation (DIN 103 5.5.2.2):
LT
=
cr
Rk
M
M

if
LT
0.4 then
LT
= 1.0
if
LT
> 0.4 then
LT
=
[ ]
5 . 0
2
LT
2
LT LT
1
+
1.0
and:
LT
= 0.5 [1 +
LT
(
LT
-0.4) +
LT
2
]
and:
LT
= 0.21 for hot rolled sections

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 99 / 242
M
cr
: Negative elastic critical moment, given by the formula (ENV 1994-1-1 B.1.2
(4)):
M
cr
=
(
(
|
|
\
|
+
afz a
2
2
s
at
4 c
I E
L k
I G
L
C k

L: Length between lateral restraints = length of the considered span
I
at
: Torsional inertia of steel section
I
afz
: Bending flexural inertia of the lower flange about vertical axis
I
afz
= b t
fs
/12
C
4
: Coefficient given by Table B.1 of ENV1994-1-1, as a function of the moment
distribution over the span.
h
s
: distance between shear centres of the flanges
k
s
: Transverse rigidity of the beam per unit of length, given by:
k
s
=
2 1
2 1
k k
k k
+

With:
k
1
: Flexural rigidity of the slab given by:
k
1
= 4 E
a
I
2
* / a
k
2
: Flexural rigidity of the web, given by:
k
2
=
( )
s
3
w a
h 1 4
t E

a: Spacing between files of girders
I
2
*: Transverse second moment of area of the slab

k
c
: Coefficient given by ENV1994-1-1 B.1.3:
k
c
=
s
2
x
2
s
ay
y s
h
e
i
4
h
I
I h
+
+

With:
i
x
2
= (I
ay
+ I
az
) / A
a

A
a
: Area of steel section
A
s
: Area of the composite section
I
ay
, I
az
: Bending flexural inertia of the steel section

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 100 / 242
e =
) A A ( z A
I A
a c a
ay

z
c
: spacing between centre of steel section and centre of the slab

The calculations are very long and cannot be described in this document. Particularly, the C
4

coefficient should be calculated for each combination of loads, because it depends on the
distribution of moment. The intermediate results are nevertheless given hereafter, for the
section of the girder n1 located on the first intermediate pi er, under loads due the
combination ULS n7, according to the previous relations:

Figure 49 : Principle of calculation of I
2
*

So: I
ay
= 303400 cm
4
I
az
= 12640 cm
4
A
a
= 285.8 cm
2

I
afz
= 6300 cm
4
I
at
= 596.9 cm
4
h
s
= h
t
t
f
= 762 mm
From these values: i
x
2
= 1105.8 cm
2
k
2
= 255.53 N/m
Calculation of I
2
*:
Assumptions (used in ACOBRI):
Transverse reinforcement ratio of the slab:
rein
= 0.5 %
Position of the reinforcement layer: z
rein
= 40 mm
Modular ratio: m = 6.31
Slab thickness: E
slab
= 270 mm
From these values:
z
G
= 215.3 mm and I
2
* = 50.13 cm
4
/cm
Considering a = 3500 mm, k
1
= 6015.8 N/m and k
s
= 245.12 N/m
Application of B.1.3 of ENV1994-1-1:
Effective width of the slab: L
slab
= 2.558 m
Composite area (under negative moment): A
a
= 36176 cm
2

Composite second moment of area: I
y
= 498851 cm
4

So: e = 954 mm and k
c
= 1.22
For span 1 and under ULS combination of loads n7, y = 1.8719 and moment at the
abutment is considered as equal to zero. So according to Table B1 of ENV1994-1-1,
C
4
= 16.319 and then M
cr
= 12612 kNm.
For the section, the bending resistances under negative moments are:
M
Rd
= 4790.6 kNm and M
Rk
= 4876.0 kNm
So:
LT
= 0.628 and
LT
= 0.930
zG
L = 1
Eslab
zrein
Compressive
part of the slab
Part of the slab in
tension (neglected)

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 101 / 242
So: M
bRd
=
LT
M
Rd

M0
/
M1
= 4050.2 kNm
In the considered section, M
Ed
= 4201 kNm
So: = M
Ed
/ M
bRd
= 1.037
Values calculated by ACOBRI: M
bRd
= 4049 kNm and = 1.039 (Deviation = 0.2%)


ANSYS ACOBRI
Sect
ion
Spa
n
Typ
e
M
Ed
M
PlRd
Cn M
Ed
M
PlRd
Cn (%)
1 1 S 319,1 4046 0,079 4 318 4046 0,079 4 0,18
10 1 M 55,7 4189 0,013 2 55 4189 0,013 2 -2,18
16L 1 L 1983,8 4122 0,481 1 1984 4122 0,481 1 -0,06
16R 1 L 2504,3 4145 0,604 7 2503 4145 0,604 7 -0,02
19 1-2 S 4201,0 4049 1,038 7 4206 4049 1,039 7 0,14
23L 2 L 1388,5 4009 0,346 7 1386 4008 0,346 7 -0,11
23R 2 L 771,7 4001 0,193 1 770 4000 0,193 1 0,05
31 2 M 0 0 0 0
39L 2 L 770,4 4001 0,193 1 773 4000 0,193 1 0,22
39R 2 L 1387,2 4009 0,346 7 1389 4008 0,346 7 -0,01
43 2-3 S 4209,4 3910 1,077 7 4210 3909 1,077 7 0,05
46L 3 L 2504,2 4145 0,604 7 2504 4145 0,604 7 -0,02
46R 3 L 1983,8 4122 0,481 1 1984 4122 0,481 1 -0,06
52 3 M 55,7 4189 0,013 2 55 4189 0,013 2 -2,19
61 3 S 319,1 4046 0,079 4 318 4046 0,079 4 0,18

For significant values, the deviations are less than 1%.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 102 / 242

Figure 50 : Lateral torsional buckling under negative bending moment

0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0,70
0,80
0,90
1,00
1,10
0 10 20 30 40 50
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 103 / 242
3.4.5 Fatigue limit states
3.4.5.1 Additional amplification factor
The additional amplification factor
fat
is given by DIN 101: 2003 4.6.1. It is function of D, the
distance of the cross-section under consideration to the expansion joint. The expansion joints
are supposed to be located at the abutments only. So that theoretical values can be
calculated and compared to the ones calculated by ACOBRI:

Theoretical ACOBRI
Section D (m)
fat
(RV)
fat
(CS)
1 0 1.3000 1.300
4 2.25 1.1875 1.188
10 to 52 > 6.0 1.0000 1.000
58 2.25 1.1875 1.188
61 0 1.3000 1.300

3.4.5.2 Damage equivalence factor
The damage equivalence factor is calculated according to DIN 103: 2003 9.5.2, with the
following relation:
=
1

2

3

4

max

Calculation of
1
and
max
:

Span
Span
Length (m)
1
from Abb. II
9-1 or 9-2
max
from Abb.
II 9-3 or 9-4
1 at midspan 15.0 2.500 2.333
1-2 at support 18.5 1.873 1.800
2 at midspan 22.0 2.430 2.100
2-3 at support 18.5 1.873 1.800
3 at midspan 15.0 2.500 2.333

Calculation of
2
:

2
=
5 / 1
0
obs
0
1 m
N
N
Q
Q
|
|
\
|

With: Q
0
= 480 kN
N
0
= 0.5x10
6

N
obs
is the total number of lorries per year in the slow lane

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 104 / 242
Q
m1
is the gross weight in kN of the lorry in the slow lane
here N
obs
= 0.125 x 10
6
and Q
m1
= 480 kN

So:
2
= 0.758

Calculation of
3
:

3
= (t
nd
/ 100)
1/5
= 1.0 for t
nd
= 100 years (the design life of the bridge)

Calculation of
4
:

4
=
5 / 1
5
1 m 1
2 m 2
1
2
Q
Q
N
N
1
(
(
|
|
\
|
+ for the considered bridge with two slow lanes.

With: k: Number of lanes with heavy traffic; here k = 2
N
j
: Number of lorries per year in lane j; here N
1
= N
2

Q
mj
: Average gross weight of the lorries in lane j; here Q
m1
= Q
m2

j
: Value of the influence line for the internal force that produces the
stress range in the middle of lane j.
The index 1 is attributed to the most influent slow lane for the
considered girder and the index 2 to the lowest influent slow lane. So
that
1

2
.

File P1 File P2 File P3
1
0.557 0.574 0.890
2
0.037 0.380 0.172
4
1.000 1.024 1.000

Theoretical values of :

The theoretical values of can be assessed from the previous calculations:

Span Girder P1 Girder P2 Girder P3
1 at midspan 1.895 1.940 1.895
1-2 at support 1.420 1.454 1.420
2 at midspan 1.842 1.886 1.842
2-3 at support 1.420 1.454 1.420
3 at midspan 1.895 1.940 1.895

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 105 / 242
Values of calculated by ACOBRI (from Calculation Sheet):

Section Span File P1 File P2 File P3
10 Mid span 1 1.895 1.940 1.895
19 Support 1-2 1.419 1.453 1.419
31 Mid span 2 1.842 1.886 1.842
43 Support 2-3 1.419 1.453 1.419
52 Mid span 3 1.895 1.940 1.895


Figure 51 : Values of the product
fat
along the girder n1

0,0
0,5
1,0
1,5
2,0
2,5
3,0
0,0 10,0 20,0 30,0 40,0 50,0

fat

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 106 / 242
3.4.5.3 Stress ranges in upper flange
The stress ranges in upper flange are calculated for the combination defined in chapter
3.4.1.4, taking into account the state of concrete slab (cracked or not). The stress ranges are
calculated according to DIN 104 4.9.4.1 (3):
E
=
fat
|
maxf

minf
|
With:
fat
: Additional amplification factor
: Damage equivalent factor
maxf
: Maximal stress in the flange under FLM3 load, taking into account the state of
the concrete
minf
: Minimal stress in the flange under FLM3 load, taking into account the state of
the concrete
The stress ranges in upper flange are verified according to DIN 104 4.9.6 with the following
relation:
Ff

E

c
/
Mf

And the ratio can be expressed with the formula:
f
=
Ff

Mf

E
/
c

With:
Ff
: Partial factor for equivalent constant amplitude stress range
Mf
: Partial factor for fatigue strength
c
: Reference value of the fatigue strength at 2 million cycles

For the studied bridge:
Ff
= 1.0
Mf
= 1.15
c
= 80 MPa for upper flange (studs)
c
= 160 MPa for lower flange

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 107 / 242
following table:

ANSYS ACOBRI
10 1 M 0,079 0,079 0,46%
16L 1 L 0,529 0,529 0,00%
16R 1 L 0,396 0,395 -0,30%
19 1-2 S 0,418 0,417 -0,13%
23L 2 L 0,143 0,143 0,20%
23R 2 L 0,185 0,186 0,43%
31 2 M 0,073 0,073 0,32%
39L 2 L 0,185 0,186 0,44%
39R 2 L 0,143 0,143 0,21%
43 2-3 S 0,418 0,417 -0,13%
46L 3 L 0,396 0,395 -0,30%
46R 3 L 0,529 0,529 0,00%
52 3 M 0,079 0,079 0,46%
All deviations less than 1%.

Figure 52 : Stress range under fatigue loads in the upper flanges
Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios for ULF Combinations
Ratio
0,0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,0 10,0 20,0 30,0 40,0 50,0
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 108 / 242
3.4.5.4 Stress ranges in lower flange
The same method is applied to calculate the stress ranges in lower flange, except the value
of
c
which is here equal to 160 MPa. The results obtained for the checked sections of
girder n1 (see Figure 5) are given in the followin g table:
ANSYS ACOBRI
10 1 M 0,551 0,5505 -0,06%
16L 1 L 0,543 0,543 -0,01%
16R 1 L 0,407 0,405 -0,43%
19 1-2 S 0,386 0,386 -0,13%
23L 2 L 0,265 0,263 -0,62%
23R 2 L 0,343 0,34 -1,00%
31 2 M 0,611 0,61 -0,09%
39L 2 L 0,343 0,341 -0,70%
39R 2 L 0,265 0,264 -0,24%
43 2-3 S 0,386 0,386 -0,13%
46L 3 L 0,407 0,405 -0,43%
46R 3 L 0,543 0,543 -0,01%
52 3 M 0,551 0,5505 -0,06%

Figure 53 : Stress range under fatigue loads in the lower flanges
Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios for ULF Combinations
Ratio
0,0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
0,0 10,0 20,0 30,0 40,0 50,0
P1 ANSYS
P2 ANSYS
P3 ANSYS
P1 ACOBRI
P2 ACOBRI
P3 ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 109 / 242
3.5 Connection
The design of the connection is one specific part of ACOBRI. The studs density is indeed
not defined by the User but by ACOBRI, from SLS and ULS requirements and from forces
and moments calculated before. The parameters to be defined by the User are summarized
in the following table, with the values considered for this bridge.

Parameter Symbol Values for the bridge
Height of the stud h
c
175 mm
Diameter of the stud d
c
22 mm
Ultimate strength of the stud steel f
u
450 MPa
Partial factor for connection
v
1,25

3.5.1 Shear resistance of the stud
The shear resistance of the stud is given by the following formula (DIN 1046.3.2.1 (1)):
P
Rd
= min (P
Rd1
; P
Rd2
) = 104.5 kN
P
Rd1
= 0.8 f
u
( d
c
2
/4) /
v
= 109,5 kN
P
Rd2
= 0.25 d
c
2

cm ck
E f /
v
= 104.5 kN
With:
= 1.0, because h
c
/ d
c
= 7.95
f
ck
= 35 MPa (compressive strength of concrete)
E
cm
= 33282 MPa (Elastic modulus of concrete)

3.5.2 Serviceability Limit States requirements
For studs under characteristic combination (ENV 6.1.3 (2)) or under non frequent
combination (DIN 104 6.1.3), the shear force in the element should not exceed 0.6 P
Rd
. The
criterion considered in ACOBRI is expressed by the following formula:
G = V
Ed
S / I 0,6 n
s
P
Rd

Where:
V
Ed
: Shear force
S: First moment of area of the slab about the neutral axis
I: Second moment of area of the composite section
P
Rd
: Shear resistance of the stud
n
s
: Stud density

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 110 / 242
The stud density is calculated between each node of the model to comply with this
requirement. At the end of this process, the numbers of studs required are:

Beam n1 Beam n2 Beam n3
Span 1 84 114 107
Span 2 140 185 175
Span 3 84 114 106
Sum 308 413 388

3.5.3 Ultimate Limit States requirements
For each combination, each beam and each span, the following process is carried out,
according to ENV1994-2 6.2.3:

Figure 54 : Analysis of the moment distribution

- Search of the most solicited section under positive moment. Section B (see Figure
54) for which the ratio M
Sd
/ M
plrd
is maximum. For the easiness of the process, this
section B is taken equal for all combination.
- Calculation of the normal compression force in the slab in the section B, according
to the following relation:
F
B
=
aSd plRd
aSd SdB
M M
M M
L
part
E
Dalle
0,85 f
cj
/
c

where:
M
SdB
: Positive moment in section B for the combination
M
aSd
: Part of the moment due to construction phase
M
plRd
: Positive plastic moment of the section
L
part
: Effective width of the slab
E
Dalle
: Effective thickness of the slab
f
cj
: compressive strength of the concrete
- Calculation of the tension forces F
A
and F
B
in the reinforcement for the sections A
and C.
- Between section A and B, the number of studs should verify: F
A
+ F
B
n
AB
P
Rd

A C
M
Sd

M
pl,Rd

B

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 111 / 242
- Between section B and C, the number of studs should verify: F
C
+ F
B
n
BC
P
Rd

- The distribution of studs calculated under SLS requirements is linearly adapted so
that the ULS requirements are fulfilled.

At the end of this process, the stud distributions obtained are:

Beam n1 Beam n2 Beam n3 Sum
Span 1 166 174 172 512
Span 2 230 225 232 687
Span 3 166 172 172 510
Sum 562 571 576 1709

The stud distribution calculated by ACOBRI is (Post Processing):

Beam n1 Beam n2 Beam n3 Sum
Span 1 177 183 181 541
Span 2 250 250 260 760
Span 3 176 186 183 545
Sum 603 619 624 1846

The quantities given in the calculation sheet are increased by 30%, to take into account the
construction requirements. For a mass per stud equal to 0,567 kg, the results are:

Theoretical ACOBRI
Number Mass (kg) Number Mass (kg)
Span 1 665 377 703 399
Span 2 893 506 988 561
Span 3 708 402 709 402
Sum 2266 1285 1362

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 112 / 242
4 REFERENCE ROAD BRIDGE UNDER EN RULES
REFERENCE ROAD BRIDGE UNDER EN RULES
Road bridge Eurocode EN rules
Normal beams Three beams, three spans
See chapter 3.1
See chapter 3.1
File: ROAD_EN_1.APM

When not explained in this chapter, the reference values used hereafter are justified in the
chapter 3.
4.2 FE modelisation

Spans
1 2 3

Reference ACOBRI Reference ACOBRI Reference ACOBRI
Line 1 3.43 3.43 3.43 3.43 2.97 2.97
of 2 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.00 3.00
girders 3 3.43 3.43 3.43 3.43 2.97 2.97


Reference ACOBRI
Shrinkage and thermal
16.16 16.16
Dead loads
15.98 15.98
Live loads 6.31 6.31

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 113 / 242
4.2.3 Masses

Reference ACOBRI
Overlength (mm) 400 2 x 200
3
) 140.4 140.4
Footways mass (kg) 80262 80262
Roadway surfacing mass (kg) 66976 66976

4.2.4 Moments of inertia of the girders elements

Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
(cm4)
RV CS RV CS RV CS
Spans 1 and 3 : Effective width of slab = 3.43 m (values at mid-span)
Dead loads phase 876342 876469 71010 71052
548546 548679
178919 179058
Span 2: Effective width of slab = 3.50 m (values at mid-span)
Dead loads phase 880636 880609 72447 72438
552258 552258
182558 182568

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 114 / 242

RV ACOBRI RV ACOBRI
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 4491 4490 89.8 90
n
eq
= 15.98 I
t
(cm
3
) 8981 8980 179.6 180
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 4441 4440 88.8 89
n
eq
= 16.16 I
t
(cm
3
) 8881 8880 177.6 178
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 11373 11373 227.5 227
n
eq
= 6.31 I
t
(cm
3
) 22745 22746 454.9 455
RV ACOBRI RV ACOBRI
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 3849 3849 7698 7697
n
eq
= 15.98 I
t
(cm
3
) 7698 7697 15396 15395
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 3806 3806 7612 7611
n
eq
= 15.98 I
t
(cm
3
) 7613 7611 15225 15222
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 9748 9748 19496 19497
n
eq
= 15.98 I
t
(cm
3
) 19496 19497 38992 38994

4.3 Loads and solicitations
4.3.1 Dead loads
Same sections as described in chapter 3.3.
4.3.1.1 Weight
Bending moment
On the left (kNm)
Section Span Type RV ACOBRI Deviat.
10 1 M -251.3 -251.3 0.00 %
19 1-2 S 924.7 924.9 0.02 %
31 2 M -610.5 -610.7 0.03 %
43 2-3 S 924.7 924.9 0.02 %
52 3 M -251.3 -251.3 0.00 %
Type Legend: S: Support M: Mid span section

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 115 / 242
Shear force
On the left (kN)
10 1 M 506.1 50.56 -0.10 %
19 1-2 S 242.4 242.5 0.02 %
31 2 M -121.8 -12.21 0.25 %
43 2-3 S 268.7 268.7 0.00 %
52 3 M -72.7 -72.8 0.12 %
No significant deviations
Bending moment
On the left (kNm)
10 1 M -185,1 -185,3 0,14%
19 1-2 S 509,6 509,2 -0,06%
31 2 M -420,6 -421,0 0,09%
43 2-3 S 511,8 511,5 -0,06%
52 3 M -185,0 -185,5 0,25%
Shear force
On the left (kN)
10 1 M 25,9 25,8 -0,28%
19 1-2 S 151,9 152,0 0,10%
31 2 M -7,2 -7,2 0,61%
43 2-3 S 169,1 168,6 -0,29%
52 3 M -39,2 -39,3 0,19%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 116 / 242
4.3.1.3 Equipment
Bending moment
On the left (kNm)
10 1 M -20,9 -20,9 -0,02%
19 1-2 S 53,6 53,6 -0,01%
31 2 M -39,6 -39,6 -0,02%
43 2-3 S 53,9 53,9 0,00%
52 3 M -21,0 -21,0 0,02%

Shear force
On the left (kN)
10 1 M 2,4 2,4 -0,34%
19 1-2 S 17,5 17,5 0,01%
31 2 M -0,6 -0,6 -0,43%
43 2-3 S 18,7 18,7 -0,02%
52 3 M -3,8 -3,8 0,08%

4.3.1.4 Shrinkage of concrete
On the left (kNm)
10 1 M -436,0 -436,1 0,03%
19 1-2 S 460,9 461,0 0,01%
31 2 M -215,0 -215,0 -0,02%
43 2-3 S 462,7 462,8 0,01%
52 3 M -436,0 -436,1 0,04%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 117 / 242
On the left (kNm)
10 1 M -658,1 -656,12 -0,30%
19 1-2 S 0,0 0
31 2 M -662,4 -662,37 0,00%
43 2-3 S 0,0 0
52 3 M -658,1 -658,12 0,00%

On the left (kNm)
10 1 M 222,2 222,00 -0,07%
19 1-2 S 460,9 460,99 0,01%
31 2 M 447,4 447,40 0,01%
43 2-3 S 462,7 462,78 0,01%
52 3 M 222,2 222,01 -0,07%

On the left x 1000 (kN)
10 1 M 3,733 3,732 -0,02%
19 1-2 S 0,000 0
31 2 M 3,807 3,806 -0,02%
43 2-3 S 0,000 0
52 3 M 3,733 3,732 -0,02%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 118 / 242
Shear force
On the left (kN)
10 1 M 30,6 30,7 0,02%
19 1-2 S 36,4 36,4 0,02%
31 2 M -0,2 -0,2 8,79%
43 2-3 S 1,1 1,1 0,68%
52 3 M -31,1 -31,2 0,07%

4.3.1.5 Thermal loads +
On the left (kNm)
10 1 M 92,6 92,7 0,06%
19 1-2 S -30,0 -29,9 -0,10%


On the left (kNm)
10 1 M 212,3 212,3 0,00%
19 1-2 S 212,3 212,3 0,00%


On the left (kNm)
10 1 M -119,7 -119,63 -0,04%
19 1-2 S -242,3 -242,24 -0,01%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 119 / 242


On the left x1000 (kN)
10 1 M -1,204 -1,204 -0,03%
19 1-2 S -1,204 -1,204 -0,03%

Shear force

On the left (kN)
10 1 M -16,1 -16,1 -0,01%
19 1-2 S -16,6 -16,6 -0,02%

4.3.1.6 Thermal loads -


On the left (kNm)
10 1 M -92,6 -92,7 0,06%
19 1-2 S 30,0 29,9 -0,10%


On the left (kNm)
10 1 M -212,3 -212,3 0,00%
19 1-2 S -212,3 -212,3 0,00%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 120 / 242

On the left (kNm)
10 1 M 119,7 119,6 -0,04%
19 1-2 S 242,3 242,2 -0,01%


On the left x1000 (kN)
10 1 M 1,204 1,204 -0,03%
19 1-2 S 1,204 1,204 -0,03%

Shear force

On the left (kN)
10 1 M 16,1 16,1 -0,01%
19 1-2 S 16,6 16,6 -0,02%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 121 / 242
4.3.2 Live loads
4.3.2.1 Load model 1 System TS
Bending moment

The values of aQi coefficients are equal to 1,0 in this calculation (EN rules) but are equal to
0.8 in the DIN calculations. So that the Reference values are obtained from the theoretical
results calculated in chapter 3.3.2.1 divided by 0.8.

Section Span Type RV ACOBRI (%). RV ACOBRI (%).
10 1 M 294,6 295,8 0,4% -872,3 -871,1 -0,1%
19 1-2 S 537,9 529,5 -1,6% -83,8 -83,4 -0,4%
31 2 M 134,8 134,3 -0,3% -1129,8 -1128,7 -0,1%
43 2-3 S 537,9 528,3 -1,8% -83,8 -83,4 -0,4%
52 3 M 294,6 294,8 0,1% -872,3 -870,6 -0,2%

Shear force
On the left (kN)
Section Span Type RV ACOBRI (%).
10 1 M 88,7 84,5 -4,8%
19 1-2 S 203,6 165,4 -18,7%
31 2 M 83,9 84,2 0,4%
43 2-3 S 219,3 203,7 -7,1%
52 3 M 51,2 46,6 -9,0%
On the left (kN)
Section Span Type RV ACOBRI (%).
10 1 M -71,9 -65,2 -9,3%
19 1-2 S -12,7 -7,2 -43,1%
31 2 M -103,4 -103,0 -0,4%
43 2-3 S -19,5 -19,4 -0,3%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 122 / 242
52 3 M -111,2 -100,6 -9,5%
For significant values, the same deviations are obtained as for the bridge under DIN rules.
4.3.2.2 Load model 1 System UDL

Bending moment

10 1 M 161,8 161,6 -0,07% -308,6 -310,7 0,66%
19 1-2 S 405,8 414,5 2,15% -32,9 -33,5 1,87%
31 2 M 104,3 104,6 0,27% -498,9 -503,1 0,84%
43 2-3 S 407,5 414,5 1,73% -33,2 -33,5 1,04%
52 3 M 161,8 161,6 -0,07% -306,2 -310,7 1,48%

4.3.2.3 Uniformly distributed loads on the footways

Bending moment

10 1 M 102,5 102,5 -0,01% -248,6 -248,6 0,00%
19 1-2 S 381,5 386,1 1,21% -22,6 -22,6 -0,02%
31 2 M 60,5 60,5 -0,02% -366,4 -366,4 -0,01%
43 2-3 S 386,1 386,1 -0,01% -22,6 -22,6 -0,02%
52 3 M 102,5 102,5 0,00% -248,6 -248,6 0,00%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 123 / 242
4.4 Sections characteristics
4.4.1 Effective width of concrete for verifications
The same formulas are used in EN as in DIN rules. So the reference values of 3.4.2.1 are
unchanged.
P1 P3
Section Span Type RV ACOBRI RV ACOBRI
1 1 S 2.62 2.62 2.37 2.37
10 1 M 3.43 3.43 2.97 2.97
16 1 L 3.08 3.08 2.79 2.79
19 1-2 S 2.56 2.56 2.53 2.53
23 2 L 3.12 3.12 2.81 2.81
31 2 M 3.50 3.50 3.00 3.00
39 2 L 3.12 3.12 2.81 2.81
43 2-3 S 2.56 2.56 2.53 2.53
46 3 L 3.08 3.08 2.79 2.79
52 3 M 3.43 3.43 2.97 2.97
61 3 S 2.62 2.62 2.37 2.37

According to EN 1994-2 7.4.2, the minimum reinforcement is verified in each section with the
following relation:
s
<
s,min
=
s
eff , ct c s
f k k k

With:
s
: reinforcement factor:
s
= 1.1 %
k
s
= 0.9
k = 0.8
f
ct,eff
: mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete
f
ct,eff
= f
ctm
= 0.3 f
cj
2/3
= 3.21 MPa
k
c
: is a coefficient which takes account of the stress distribution within the section
immediately prior to cracking and is given by:

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 124 / 242
k
c
=
0
c
z 2
h
1
1
+
+ 0.3 1.0
h
c
: is the thickness of the concrete flange, excluding any haunch or ribs. For this
example, h
c
= 270 mm.
z
0
: is the vertical distance between the centroids of the un-cracked concrete
flange and the uncracked composite section, calculated using the modular
ratio n
eq
for short-term loading (here n
eq
= 6.31).
s
: is the maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement immediately after
cracking. The value of
s
is given by Table 7.1 of EN 1994-2 from a maximum
bar diameter = 20 mm, for w
k
= 2 mm. So
s
= 182.2 MPa.

The validation is carried out for the three following sections of the first girder in the first span:
- section 1 (Abutment)
- section 10 (Mid span)
- section 19 (Support)
For these sections, reference values and ACOBRI values are given in the following table:
Theoretical
ACOBRI
Section z
El
(mm)
(1)
z
D
(mm)
(2)
z
0
(mm)
(3)
k
c

s,min
(%)
s,min
(%)
1 817.4 925 107.6 0.74 0.943 0.94
10 838.7 925 86.4 0.69 0.875 0.88
19 815.2 925 109.8 0.75 0.949 0.95
(1): location of the elastic neutral axis of the composite section, from the calculation sheet,
calculated from the bottom fibre of the steel section.
(2): location of the elastic neutral axis of the slab, calculated from the bottom fibre of the
steel section.
(3): z
0
= z
D
- z
El

No significant deviation.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 125 / 242
4.5.1.2 Stress limits
According to EN 1994-2:2005 7.2.2, the following verifications have to be carried out:
- Concrete: characteristic combinations:
c
k
1
f
ck
where k
1
= 0.6
quasi-permanent combinations:
c
k
2
f
ck
where k
2
= 0.45
- Reinforcement: characteristic combinations:
r
k
3
f
sk
where k
3
= 0.8
r
is calculated according to EN1994-2:2005 7.4.3 (3):
r
=
r0
+
avec: =
s st
ctm
f 4 . 0

- Lower and upper flanges: characteristic combinations:
Ed
f
y
/
M,ser

Ed

ser , M
y
3
f

2
Ed
2
Ed
3 + f
y
/
M,ser

The validation is made for the following sections of the first girder:
- Section 10: mid-span of the first span
- Section 19: intermediate support between spans 1 and 2.
The section properties, the forces and the moments are read from the calculation sheet of
ACOBRI. The stress limits are obtained from the following values:
Concrete: f
ck
= 35 MPa and f
ctm
= 3.21 MPa
Steel: f
y
= 440 MPa
Reinforcement: f
sk
= 500 MPa
Partial coefficient:
Mser
= 1.0

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 126 / 242
The reference calculations are carried out in an EXCEL sheet (ELS Contraintes Section
10-19.xls) and their results are compared hereunder with the ACOBRI results.

Section 10 Section 19
Reference ACOBRI Reference ACOBRI
Compression stress in the concrete
Design value
c
(MPa) 5.00 5.00 0 0
Combination of the maximum value 1 1 - -
Stress limit k
1
f
ck
(MPa) 21 21 21 21
Tension stress in the reinforcement
Design value
r
(MPa) 100.83 100.83 298.10 298.10
Combination of the maximum value 12 12 11 11
Stress limit k
3
f
sk
(MPa) 400 400 400 400
Normal stress in the upper flange
Design value
t
(MPa) 89.84 89.84 252.64 252.64
Stress limit f
y
/
Mser
(MPa) 440 440 440 440
Normal stress in the lower flange
Design value
t
(MPa) 159.81 159.82 365.19 365.20
Stress limit f
y
/
Mser
(MPa) 440 440 440 440

4.5.1.3 Control of cracking
The maximum bar diameter and the maximum bar spacing of the reinforcement have to
calculated with the Tables 7.1 and 7.2 from the value of the tension stress in reinforcement
as calculated under frequent combinations of loads.
The maximal bar diameter can also be modified with the following relation:
= * f
ctm
/ 2.9
The validation is done for the two same sections 10 and 19 as in previous chapter and the
reference calculations are carried out with the same EXCEL sheet.
The reference results are compared hereunder with the ACOBRI results.

Maximum bar diameter 25 25 12.98 13
Combination of this maximum value - - 23 23
Maximum bar spacing 200 200 96.5 96
Combination of the maximum value - - 23 23

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 127 / 242
4.5.2.1 Shear buckling
According to EN 1993-1-5:2006 5, the shear buckling of the web is verified according to the
following checking:
If h
w
/ t
w
> 72 / then
3
= V
Ed
/ V
bRd
else
3
= 0 (no checking)
3
should verify
3
1.0
Where: V
Ed
is the shear force cumulated under ULS combinations
V
bRd
is the shear buckling resistance given by:
V
bRd
= V
bwRd
=
1 M
w w yw w
3
t h f

=
y
f / 235
h
w
, t
w
: dimensions of the web (hw height between the two flanges)
: Coefficient given by EN 1993-1-5 5. For S460 grade, = 1.20
w
: Reduction factor from Table 5.1 of EN1993-1-5
The validation is done for the section 19 of the first girder (intermediate support between
spans 1 and 2). The reference calculations are carried out in the EXCEL sheet ELU
Deversement Section 19 and the results obtained are:
h
w
= 734 mm; t
w
= 15 mm and h
w
/ t
w
= 48.9
f
y
= 440 MPa; = 0.731 and 72 / = 43.8
h
w
/ t
w
> 72 / so shear buckling is to be verified and:
w
= 1.07
V
bRd
= 2724 kN
V
Ed
= 1063 kN maxima for combination n7
3
= 0.39
The ACOBRI values are
3
= 0.39 for combination n7.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 128 / 242
4.5.3.1 Stress ranges in the steel beam
According to EN 1994-2:2005 6.8.6, the following verifications have to be carried out for the
flanges of the steel profile:
E
= |
max,f

min,f
|
Where:
max,f
,
min,f
: Maximum and minimum stress values due to the circulation of a
LM3 truck on the bridge.
: damage equivalent factor
: damage equivalent impact factor
The section properties, the coefficients, the forces and the moments are read from the
calculation sheet of ACOBRI.
The reference calculations are carried out in an EXCEL sheet (ELF Contraintes Section
10-19.xls) and their results are compared hereunder with the ACOBRI results (mean values).

Stress range
E
(MPa) 7.20 7.22 36.82 36.83
Stress range
E
(MPa) 94.34 94.47 68.16 68.17

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 129 / 242
5 REFERENCE RAILWAY BRIDGE
REFERENCE RAILWAY BRIDGE
Railway bridge DIN rules
Filler beam deck Six beams, two spans
Total length = 24 m. Span lengths: 12m each.
Section of the beams: HE600A. Steel grade: S 275.
Slab: Width = 4.95 m; Casing Depth = 15 cm; = 2500 kg/m
3

Total height (including lower flange: 0.74 mm)
2 cantilevering
3

File: RAILS_DIN_1.APM

The drawings of the bridge are represented on the following figures:

Figure 55 : Transverse drawing of the road bridge

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 130 / 242

Figure 56 : Transverse drawing of the road bridge with ACOBRI

Figure 57 : Top drawing of the road bridge

5.2 FE modelisation
A Finite Element Model of the bridge is done, based upon the Beam grid principles. The FE
piece of software ANSYS v10.0 is used. The same meshing and numbering are used as for
the ACOBRI modelisation, so that the comparisons will be made easier. The elements
properties are calculated hereafter.
For each beam, the effective width of concrete to be considered is the sum of the mid-
spacing between the adjacent beams or the spacing of the beam to the edge.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 131 / 242
The theoretical values and the values calculated by ACOBRI are compared in the following
table:

Theoretical (m) ACOBRI (m)
Beam n1 0.3 + 0.674 / 2 = 0.637 0.637
Beam n2 to 5 0.674 0.674
Beam n6 0.674 / 2 + 0.33 = 0.667 0.667

ck
= 35 MPa
cm
= 9500 (f
ck
+ 8)
1/3
E
cm
= 33282 MPa
0
= E
a
/ E
cm
= 6.31
Resistant length of the slab (without cantilevering): 4 m
Concrete depth: 715 mm
c
= 4x0.715 = 2.86 m
2

Perimeter of slab in contact with atmosphere: u ~ 2x0.715 + 4.0 = 5.43 m
(the lower face of the slab is not in contact with atmosphere)
Notional size: h
0
= 2 A
c
/ u = 1.053 m
cm
=f
ck
+ 8 = 43 MPa

1
= (35/f
cm
)
0.7
= 0.866

2
= (35/f
cm
)
0.2
= 0.960

RH
=
2
[1 +
1
(1 RH/100) / (0.10
3
0
h )] = 1.219
cm
) = 16.8 /
cm
f = 2.56
0
) = 1 / (0.1 + t
0
0.2
)
c
(t - t
0
) = 1 for t =
Creep coefficient:
t
=
0

c
(t-t
0
)
0
=
RH
(f
cm
) (t
0
)
Modular ratio: n
eq
= n
0
(1 +
L

t
)
Theoretical values:
So theoretical values of modular ratios are given in the hereafter table:
Reference
values

L
t
0
(t
0
)
0
n
eq

Dead loads 1.1 45
0,446 1,28 15.22
Live loads 0 / / / 6.31

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 132 / 242

ACOBRI values:
The values given in the calculation sheet of ACOBRI are displayed hereafter, chapter
Loads and Combinations:

n
eq

Dead loads
15.22
Live loads 6.31

5.2.3 Masses
Theoretical values:
Area of the section: HE600A: 226.5 cm
2

Total mass of steel: 7850x24x6x0.02265 = 25604 kg
Corrected mass of steel: 25604x24.4/24 = 26031 kg

Height of the slab: 0.715 mm
Area of the resistant slab: 4x0.715 = 2.86 m
2
(cantilevering not considered)
Area of the part of a steel section included in the concrete:
b
f
t
f
+ (h
t
-2t
f
) t
w
+ (4-) r
c
2
= 0.01514 m
2

Spacing between beams: 0.674 m
Width of a formwork: 0.674 2 r
c
t
w
= 0.607 m
Area of a formwork: 0.607x0.05 = 0.03035 m
2

Section of resistant concrete: 2.86 6x0.01514 5x0.03035 = 2.617 m
3

Volume of resistant concrete: 24x2.617 = 62.81 m
3

Mass of resistant concrete: 2500x62.81 = 157045 kg

Section of the cantileverings: 0.9x0.2+0.05x0.3 = 0.195 m
3

Volume of concrete in cantileverings: 0.195x24 = 4.68 m
3

Masse of concrete in cantilevering: 4.68x2500 = 11700 kg

Total volume of concrete: 62.81+4.68 = 67.49 m3
Total mass of concrete: 157045+11700 = 168745 kg

Total volume of formworks: 5x0.03037x24 = 3.644 m
3

Mass of formworks: 3.644x2400 = 8747 kg

Mass of waterproof layer: 4.95x24x0.03x2340 = 8340 kg
Mass of ballast: 4x24x0.5x2040 = 97920 kg

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 133 / 242
Load of the track per unit of length: 1.2 kN/m
Total load of the track: 1.2 x 24 = 28. kN
Equivalent mass of the track: 28./9.81 = 2935 kg

ACOBRI values:

RV CS PP
Overlength (mm) 2 x 200 2 x 200
3
) 67.49 67.5
Mass of formworks (kg) 8747 8740
Mass of ballast (kg) 97920 97920
Mass of the track 2935 2940

5.2.4 Second moments of area of the girders elements
The second moment of area to be considered in the FE calculations is the mean value of the
two following composite sections (see Figure 58):
- the first one is composed of the steel section and the complete height of concrete
- the second one is composed of the steel section and the non cracked part of concrete
under a positive moment.

Figure 58 : Second moment of area of filler beams

Effective width Effective width
I = second moment of area
considering all the concrete
I = second moment of area
considering only the non
cracked part of the concrete

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 134 / 242
The following comparisons are made for the second beam of the bridge, with an effective
width of concrete of 0.674 m.

Flexural inertia
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
(cm
4
)
RV CS RV CS
Construction phase 141200 141207 397.8 398
Dead loads phase (n
eq
= 15.22) 242571 242573 217447 217451
Live loads phase (n
eq
= 6.31) 348387 348396 523931 523959
Because of the important number of slab elements in the FE model, only few specific ones
will be checked. All ACOBRI values given hereafter come from the post processing module
(PP).

Figure 59 : Checking of slab elements

x = 0
Longitudinal slab
elements
Longitudinal girder
elements
Elt n1
Elt n29
1.20
0.60
Effective width = 0.637 m
Elt n253
Elt n261
Transverse slab
elements
0.90

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 135 / 242
Longitudinal elements:
Slab elements n1 and n29 will be checked hereunde r (see Figure 59).
The theoretical expressions for the elements characteristics are given by:
I
y
= k
1
k
2

eq
3
n 12
e b
and I
t
= k
1
k
2

eq
3
n 6
e b

Where:
I
y
, I
t
: Second moment of area and torsional inertia of the slab element
k
1
: k
1
= 1.0
k
2
: Coefficient to take care of the location of longitudinal slab elements
about main girder elements. k
2
= 1 for both controlled elements
b: Width of the slab element.
e: Thickness of the slab element. For these elements, the thickness to
be considered is the thickness of the cantilevering. e = 0.2 m.
n
eq
: Modular ratio

Width b (mm) 0.3 0.6
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 1314 1314 2628 2628
n
eq
= 15.22 I
t
(cm
3
) 2628 2628 5256 5256
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 3170 3170 6339 6339
n
eq
= 6.31 I
t
(cm
3
) 6339 6339 12678 12679
Transverse elements:
Slab elements n253 and n261 will be checked hereu nder (see Figure 59).
The same relations as for longitudinal slab elements are used to calculate the inertias,
with k
1
= 0.5 and k
2
= 1.0 for all transverse elements.

Width b (mm) 0.45 0.90
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 985.5 986 1971 1971
n
eq
= 15.22 I
t
(cm
3
) 1971 1971 3942 3942
Loads with I
y
(cm
3
) 2377 2377 4754 4755
n
eq
= 6.31 I
t
(cm
3
) 4754 4755 9509 9509

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 136 / 242
5.3.1 Dead loads
Because of the huge number of values to be checked, the results presented in this chapter
are displayed only for the following specific sections of the second beam.

Figure 60 : Sections of the second beam to be displayed
Section n1
Section n3
Section n8
Section n1 3
Section n15
Section n17
Section n22
Section n27
Section n29
Second beam

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 137 / 242
5.3.1.1 Weight
The load case Weight represents the effects of the weight of steel beams, of the lost
formworks and of the concrete of the slab just after the pouring, the cantileverings being not
considered. Only the rigidities of the steel beams are considered.
Bending moment
ANSYS ACOBRI Deviat. Section Span
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
1 1 0,0 0,0
3 1 -86,2 -85,5 -0,85
8 1 -120,0 -119,1 -0,78
13 1 80,2 79,5 -0,84
15 1-2 238,0 235,7 -0,97
17 2 80,2 79,5 -0,84
22 2 -120,0 -119,1 -0,78
27 2 -86,2 -85,5 -0,85
29 2 0,0 0,0

A very good accuracy is observed. For other beams, the deviation keeps always less
than 2.2 %

Figure 61 : Bending moments under Weight load case
-200
-150
-100
-50
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
0 5 10 15 20 25
P2 ANSYS
P2 ACOBRI
Bending moment (kNm)

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 138 / 242

Shear force

Section Span ANSYS ACOBRI Deviat. ANSYS ACOBRI Deviat.
1 1 x x x -53,86 -53,41 -0,85%
3 1 -41,91 -41,56 -0,85% -30,37 -30,11 -0,85%
8 1 14,23 14,11 -0,84% 25,38 25,17 -0,84%
13 1 69,98 69,39 -0,85% 81,53 80,84 -0,85%
15 1-2 93,48 92,69 -0,85% -93,48 -92,69 -0,85%
17 2 -81,53 -80,84 -0,85% -69,98 -69,39 -0,85%
22 2 -25,38 -25,17 -0,85% -14,23 -14,11 -0,84%
27 2 30,37 30,11 -0,84% 41,91 41,56 -0,85%
29 2 53,86 53,41 -0,85% x x x

A good accuracy of results can be observed. The symmetry of the results is also
obtained. For other beams, the deviation keeps always less than 2.0%.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 139 / 242
5.3.1.2 Cantilevering Weight
The load case Cantilevering Weight represents the effects of the weight of the
cantileverings. The cantileverings are poured when the concrete of the main part of the slab
is resistant, so that the composite effects are considered with a modular ratio equal to 15.22.
Bending moment
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
1 1 0,0 40,0
3 1 -7,8 -7,8 -0,17%
8 1 -10,3 -10,3 -0,15%
13 1 6,1 6,1 -0,11%
15 1-2 24,1 24,1 -0,17%
17 2 6,1 6,1 -0,11%
22 2 -10,3 -10,3 -0,15%
27 2 -7,8 -7,8 -0,17%
29 2 40,1 -52,8

than 0.8 %

Shear force

1 1 x x x -5,09 -5,08 -0,20%
3 1 -3,82 -3,81 -0,20% -2,41 -2,41 -0,09%
8 1 0,98 0,98 -0,05% 1,81 1,81 -0,12%
13 1 6,80 6,79 -0,20% 9,11 9,09 -0,28%
15 1-2 10,86 10,85 -0,09% -10,86 -10,85 -0,09%
17 2 -9,11 -9,09 -0,28% -6,80 -6,79 -0,21%
22 2 -1,81 -1,81 -0,12% -0,98 -0,98 -0,16%
27 2 2,41 2,41 -0,09% 3,82 3,81 -0,20%
29 2 5,09 5,08 -0,20% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 140 / 242
The load case Superstructure represents the effects of the weight of the ballast, of the
waterproof layer and of the rail track. The composite effects are considered with a modular
ratio equal to 15.22. The load of the rail track is equal to 1200 N/m, divided and loaded at the
location of the both rails.
Bending moment
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
1 1 -0,1 -101,0
3 1 -48,0 -47,9 -0,26%
8 1 -67,0 -66,8 -0,22%
13 1 44,9 44,8 -0,20%
15 1-2 132,0 131,3 -0,53%
17 2 44,9 44,8 -0,20%
22 2 -67,0 -66,8 -0,22%
27 2 -48,0 -47,9 -0,26%
29 2 -96,5 -40,4

than 0.6 %

Shear force

1 1 x x x -29,65 -29,53 -0,38%
3 1 -23,41 -23,38 -0,15% -16,95 -16,90 -0,26%
8 1 7,97 7,94 -0,37% 14,20 14,15 -0,37%
13 1 38,93 38,87 -0,16% 45,28 45,15 -0,27%
15 1-2 50,94 50,80 -0,27% -50,94 -50,80 -0,27%
17 2 -45,28 -45,15 -0,27% -38,93 -38,87 -0,15%
22 2 -14,20 -14,15 -0,37% -7,97 -7,94 -0,33%
27 2 16,95 16,90 -0,27% 23,41 23,37 -0,16%
29 2 29,65 29,53 -0,38% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 141 / 242
The load case Superstructure + represents the effects of the weight of the ballast, of the
waterproof layer and of the rail track. The weight of the ballast is increased by an uncertainty
factor of 1.10.The composite effects are considered with a modular ratio equal to 15.22.
Bending moment
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
1 1 -0,1 -104,0
3 1 -52,3 -52,1 -0,24%
8 1 -72,9 -72,8 -0,21%
13 1 48,8 48,8 -0,18%
15 1-2 143,0 143,0 -0,01%
17 2 48,8 48,8 -0,18%
22 2 -72,9 -72,8 -0,21%
27 2 -52,3 -52,1 -0,24%
29 2 -99,5 -41,6

than 0.5 %

Shear force

1 1 x x x -32,30 -32,18 -0,37%
3 1 -25,49 -25,45 -0,13% -18,45 -18,41 -0,25%
8 1 8,68 8,65 -0,32% 15,47 15,41 -0,38%
13 1 42,38 42,32 -0,14% 49,28 49,15 -0,25%
15 1-2 55,49 55,35 -0,25% -55,49 -55,35 -0,25%
17 2 -49,28 -49,15 -0,25% -42,38 -42,32 -0,14%
22 2 -15,47 -15,41 -0,36% -8,68 -8,65 -0,32%
27 2 18,45 18,41 -0,24% 25,49 25,45 -0,14%
29 2 32,30 32,18 -0,37% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 142 / 242
The load case Superstructure - represents the effects of the weight of the ballast, of the
waterproof layer and of the rail track. The weight of the ballast is decreased by an uncertainty
factor of 0.90.The composite effects are considered with a modular ratio equal to 15.22.
Bending moment
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
1 1 -0,1 -97,0
3 1 -43,7 -43,6 -0,28%
8 1 -61,0 -60,9 -0,24%
13 1 40,9 40,8 -0,22%
15 1-2 120,0 119,6 -0,33%
17 2 40,9 40,8 -0,22%
22 2 -61,0 -60,9 -0,25%
27 2 -43,7 -43,6 -0,28%
29 2 -93,6 -39,2

than 0.6 %

Shear force

1 1 x x x -26,99 -26,88 -0,40%
3 1 -21,34 -21,30 -0,18% -15,44 -15,40 -0,28%
8 1 7,26 7,23 -0,38% 12,93 12,88 -0,42%
13 1 35,48 35,42 -0,17% 41,28 41,15 -0,30%
15 1-2 46,39 46,25 -0,29% -46,39 -46,25 -0,29%
17 2 -41,28 -41,15 -0,30% -35,48 -35,42 -0,17%
22 2 -12,93 -12,88 -0,40% -7,26 -7,23 -0,35%
27 2 15,44 15,40 -0,28% 21,34 21,30 -0,18%
29 2 26,99 26,88 -0,40% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 143 / 242
5.3.1.6 Equipment
The load case Equipment represents the effects of the load of the parapet and of the gutter.
The composite effects are considered with a modular ratio equal to 15.22.
Bending moment
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
1 1 -1,1 -1127,0
3 1 -14,6 -14,6 -0,25%
8 1 -20,4 -20,4 -0,14%
13 1 13,1 13,1 -0,06%
15 1-2 41,1 41,0 -0,19%
17 2 13,1 13,1 -0,06%
22 2 -20,4 -20,4 -0,14%
27 2 -14,6 -14,6 -0,26%
29 2 -1127,1 -664,6

than 0.7 %

Shear force

1 1 x x x -5,27 -5,24 -0,51%
3 1 -8,06 -8,04 -0,21% -4,81 -4,81 -0,01%
8 1 1,87 1,87 -0,09% 3,46 3,46 -0,08%
13 1 13,69 13,66 -0,22% 18,03 17,97 -0,36%
15 1-2 10,62 10,61 -0,09% -10,62 -10,61 -0,09%
17 2 -18,03 -17,97 -0,36% -13,69 -13,66 -0,22%
22 2 -3,46 -3,46 -0,08% -1,87 -1,87 -0,03%
27 2 4,81 4,81 0,01% 8,06 8,04 -0,21%
29 2 5,27 5,24 -0,53% x x x


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 144 / 242
5.3.2 Live loads
5.3.2.1 Assumptions
The Load Models LM71, SW0 and SW2 are calculated with the following assumptions:
- factor (DIN 101 6.3.2 (3)): = 1
- Dynamic factor calculated for a carefully maintained track(DIN 101 6.4.3.2)
= 82 . 0
2 . 0 L
44 . 1
+
= k L
m
= 1.2 x 12 = 14.4 m
= 1.22

5.3.2.2 Load Model 71
This load model, called hereafter LM71, is defined by DIN 101 (2003) 6.3.2. It represents the
static effect of vertical loading due to normal rail traffic.
The principles of calculation with ANSYS can be described by the following steps:
- Selection of the three possible location of the track: y
C
, y
C
+e and y
C
-e, where y
C
is
the theoretical location and e the uncertainty of the location.
- For each location of the track, selection of the three possible repartition of the
vertical load between the two rails, according to DIN 101 6.3.1 (see Figure 62).
- For each of the nine transverse situations, calculation of each of the longitudinal
configurations (see Figure 63).

Figure 62 : Transverse repartition of the load between the rails

The following longitudinal configurations of load have been considered taking into account
the fact that LM71 load model can be split up into several parts so that the worst effect is
reached. The configurations have been selected to cover so far as possible situations in the
calculations of the moment and of the shear force. This leads to a high number of cases
(4500 cases).
Q
Q
1
Q
2

1 : Q
1
= 0.5 Q and Q
2
= 0.5 Q
2 : Q
1
= 0.556 Q and Q
2
= 0.444 Q
3 : Q
1
= 0.444 Q and Q
2
= 0.556 Q
Transverse configurations of the
repartition of the loads:

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 145 / 242

Figure 63 : Longitudinal configurations for LM71 load model

Configuration n1:
L
xi
100 cases for 0 xi L
Configuration n2:
L
50 cases for 0 xi L / 2; 50 other steps for the symmetric cases
L / 4 xi
L
Configuration n3:
xi
L
xi
Configuration n4:
L
xi
Configuration n5:

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 146 / 242

The solicitations obtained in the elements of the beam n2 are presented hereafter:

Bending moment

3 1 37,39 37,35 -0,12% -237,85 -238,64 0,33%
8 1 124,54 124,40 -0,11% -394,99 -396,47 0,37%
13 1 222,42 223,44 0,46% -80,14 -78,41 -2,16%
15 1-2 406,64 405,93 -0,17% 0,00 0,00
17 2 222,42 223,44 0,46% -80,14 -78,41 -2,16%
22 2 124,54 124,40 -0,11% -394,99 -396,47 0,37%
27 2 37,39 37,35 -0,11% -237,85 -238,64 0,33%

A very good accuracy of results can be observed. It is to be noted that the moments
can never be greater than 0 with ACOBRI, what is conservative. It explained the
difference observed in section 15, at intermediate support.

Figure 64 : Envelope bending moments LM71 Load case Beam n2

-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 5 10 15 20 25
ANSYS
ACOBRI
M (kNm)

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 147 / 242

Shear force


1 1 x x x 20,72 20,70 -0,11%
3 1 22,68 22,55 -0,60% 29,35 25,34 -13,68%
8 1 78,36 76,86 -1,91% 92,24 92,93 0,74%
13 1 169,66 164,34 -3,14% 186,75 184,74 -1,07%
15 1-2 217,26 215,92 -0,62% 1,38 0,00
17 2 0,00 8,86 12,54 12,58 0,28%
22 2 43,14 41,67 -3,41% 50,90 52,59 3,32%
27 2 112,89 112,11 -0,69% 131,82 131,37 -0,35%
29 2 157,46 158,74 0,82% x x x


1 1 x x x -157,46 -158,74 0,81%
3 1 -131,82 -131,37 -0,34% -112,89 -112,12 -0,68%
8 1 -50,90 -52,59 3,33% -43,14 -41,68 -3,39%
13 1 -12,54 -12,58 0,28% 0,00 -8,86
15 1-2 -1,38 0,00 -217,26 -215,92 -0,62%
17 2 -186,75 -184,74 -1,07% -169,66 -164,34 -3,14%
22 2 -92,24 -92,93 0,75% -78,36 -76,86 -1,91%
27 2 -29,35 -25,34 -13,67% -22,68 -22,55 -0,60%
29 2 -20,72 -20,70 -0,12% x x x

A good accuracy of results can be observed for significant values. Some noticeable
deviations can be obtained due to the difference of methods between both calculations.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 148 / 242
5.3.2.3 Load Model SW0
This load model, called hereafter SW0, is defined by DIN 101 (2003) 6.3.3. It represents the
static effect of vertical loading due to normal rail traffic on continuous beams.
The circulation of the load model SW0 on the bridge is divided in 100 steps. The loads are
applied at the location of the rails, their spacing being equal to 1.435 m. Three locations of
the rail track are considered: y
C
, y
C
+e and y
C
-e, where y
C
is the theoretical location and e the
uncertainty of the location.
The solicitations obtained in the elements of the beam n2 are presented hereafter:

Bending moment

3 1 36,24 36,21 -0,07% -211,77 -211,61 -0,08%
8 1 120,72 120,64 -0,07% -364,96 -364,61 -0,09%
13 1 222,76 222,51 -0,11% -42,66 -42,58 -0,19%
15 1-2 410,12 409,64 -0,12% 0,00 0,00
17 2 222,76 222,51 -0,11% -42,59 -42,58 -0,02%
22 2 120,76 120,64 -0,10% -364,96 -364,61 -0,09%
27 2 36,25 36,21 -0,10% -211,77 -211,61 -0,08%


Figure 65 : Envelope bending moments SW0 Load case Girder n2

-500
-400
-300
-200
-100
0
100
200
300
400
500
0 5 10 15 20 25
M (kNm)
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 149 / 242
Shear force


1 1 x x x 20,09 20,07 -0,08%
3 1 20,16 20,14 -0,07% 20,13 20,11 -0,07%
8 1 61,94 61,79 -0,25% 76,40 76,18 -0,28%
13 1 142,81 142,41 -0,28% 161,12 161,68 0,35%
15 1-2 185,53 186,21 0,37% 0,00 0,00
17 2 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00
22 2 5,51 5,78 4,95% 16,08 16,06 -0,13%
27 2 82,93 82,76 -0,20% 106,02 106,17 0,14%
29 2 134,26 134,02 -0,18% x x x


1 1 x x x -134,26 -134,02 -0,18%
3 1 -106,05 -106,18 0,12% -82,90 -82,76 -0,17%
8 1 -16,24 -16,05 -1,15% -5,39 -5,78 7,18%
13 1 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00
15 1-2 0,00 0,00 -185,53 -186,21 0,37%
17 2 -161,12 -161,68 0,35% -141,59 -142,40 0,57%
22 2 -76,44 -76,18 -0,34% -61,95 -61,79 -0,27%
27 2 -20,13 -20,11 -0,12% -20,16 -20,14 -0,10%
29 2 -20,09 -20,07 -0,10% x x x

A good accuracy of results can be observed (all significant values less than 1%). The

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 150 / 242
This load model, called hereafter SW2, is defined by DIN 101 (2003) 6.3.3. It represents the
static effect of vertical loading due to heavy rail traffic.
The circulation of the load model SW2 on the bridge is divided in 100 steps. The loads are
applied at the location of the rails, their spacing being equal to 1.435 m. Three locations of
the rail track are considered: y
C
, y
C
+e and y
C
-e, where y
C
is the theoretical location and e the
uncertainty of the location.
The solicitations obtained in the elements of the beam n2 are given and presented
hereafter:

Bending moment

3 1 40,82 40,86 0,09% -238,62 -238,67 0,02%
8 1 135,49 136,11 0,46% -411,34 -411,23 -0,03%
13 1 247,78 248,15 0,15% -47,90 -48,17 0,56%
15 1-2 550,48 549,95 -0,10% 0,00 0,00
17 2 248,39 248,15 -0,10% -47,84 -48,17 0,68%
22 2 136,71 136,11 -0,43% -411,34 -411,23 -0,03%
27 2 40,86 40,85 -0,01% -238,62 -238,67 0,02%


Figure 66 : Envelope bending moments SW2 Load case Girder n2
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
0 5 10 15 20 25
ANSYS
ACOBRI
M (kNm)

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 151 / 242

Shear force


1 1 x x x 22,63 22,65 0,09%
3 1 22,71 22,73 0,09% 23,47 22,69 -3,32%
8 1 70,42 70,08 -0,48% 84,90 84,46 -0,52%
13 1 162,34 161,61 -0,45% 187,97 188,04 0,04%
15 1-2 224,59 223,60 -0,44% 0,00 0,00
17 2 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00
22 2 5,07 4,94 -2,74% 15,46 15,36 -0,65%
27 2 92,85 93,36 0,55% 119,91 119,74 -0,14%
29 2 151,35 151,17 -0,12% x x x


1 1 x x x -151,35 -151,17 -0,12%
3 1 -119,62 -119,74 0,10% -93,25 -93,37 0,12%
8 1 -15,67 -15,36 -1,99% -5,00 -4,93 -1,33%
13 1 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00
15 1-2 0,00 0,00 -223,37 -223,60 0,10%
17 2 -187,97 -188,04 0,04% -162,34 -161,61 -0,45%
22 2 -85,38 -84,46 -1,08% -69,84 -70,08 0,34%
27 2 -22,81 -22,69 -0,52% -22,73 -22,73 -0,01%
29 2 -22,65 -22,65 -0,02% x x x

A good accuracy of results can be observed (all significant values less than 1%). The

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 152 / 242
5.4 Validation of eigen mode
The first vertical eigen mode has been calculated with ANSYS, on the model developed for
live loads (short term modular ratio). The masses considered in the model include:
- the masses of the steel beams, of the slab concrete and of the formworks
- the masses of waterproof layer, of the ballast and of the track
- the equivalent masses of the equipment loads (parapet and gutter).
The total mass considered in the calculations is 334270 kg.
The frequency of the first eigen mode calculated by ANSYS (Lanczos method) is
f = 6.108 Hz.
The frequency of the first eigen mode calculated by ACOBRI (Rayleigh method) is
f = 6.11 Hz.

Figure 67 : First eigen mode according to ANSYS

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 153 / 242
5.5.1 Combinations
5.5.1.1 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations will be used hereafter to represent the load cases.

Abbreviation Load case
W Weight
WC Weight of cantileverings
SS Superstructure
SS(+) Superstructure +
SS(-) Superstructure -
Dead Loads
EQ Equipment
LM71 Load Model 71
SW0 Load Model SW0 Live Loads
SW1 Load model SW2

5.5.1.2 Serviceability limit states
The combinations to be considered for Serviceability Limit States are given in the following
tables:
Characteristic combinations
G + Q
With:
G = W + WC+ SS(+) + EQ or G = W + WC + SS(-) + EQ
Q = LM71 or Q = SW0 or Q = SW2
So the characteristic combinations considered in the document are:
Index Combination
SLS-1 W + WC + SS(+) + EQ + LM71
SLS-2 W + WC + SS(+) + EQ + SW0
SLS-3 W + WC + SS(+) + EQ + SW2
SLS-4 W + WC + SS(-) + EQ + LM71
SLS-5 W + WC + SS(-) + EQ + SW0
SLS-6 W + WC + SS(-) + EQ + SW2

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 154 / 242

Frequent combinations
The general relations of frequent combinations are given below:
G +
1
Q
With:
1
: Factors for combination value.
1
= 0.8 for all live loads.

So the frequent combinations considered in the document are:

Index Combination
SLS-7 W + WC + SS(+) + EQ + 0.8 LM71
SLS-8 W + WC + SS(+) + EQ + 0.8 SW0
SLS-9 W + WC + SS(+) + EQ + 0.8 SW2
SLS-10 W + WC + SS(-) + EQ + 0.8 LM71
SLS-11 W + WC + SS(-) + EQ + 0.8 SW0
SLS-12 W + WC + SS(-) + EQ + 0.8 SW2

Quasi-permanent combinations
The general relations of quasi-permanent combinations are given below:
G +
2
Q
With:
2
: Factors for combination value.
2
= 0.0 for all live loads, so that no quasi-
permanent combinations will be considered.
Non-frequent combinations
The general relations of non-frequent combinations are given below:
G +
1
Q
With:
1
: Factor for combination value.
1
= 1.0 for all live loads, so that non frequent
combinations are identical to characteristic ones.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 155 / 242
5.5.1.3 Ultimate limit states
G
G +
Q
Q
With:
G
,
Q
: Partial factors
The values of partial factors used for this bridge are:
G
= 1.35
Q
= 1.45 for LM71 or SW0 load models
Q
= 1.20 for SW2 load model

Index Combination
ULS-1 1.35 W + 1.35 WC + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.45 LM71
ULS-2 1.35 W + 1.35 WC + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.45 SW0
ULS-3 1.35 W + 1.35 WC + 1.35 SS(+) + 1.35 EQ + 1.20 SW2
ULS-4 1.35 W + 1.35 WC + 1.35 SS(-) + 1.35 EQ + 1.45 LM71
ULS-5 1.35 W + 1.35 WC + 1.35 SS(-) + 1.35 EQ + 1.45 SW0
ULS-6 1.35 W + 1.35 WC + 1.35 SS(-) + 1.35 EQ + 1.20 SW2

5.5.1.4 Fatigue limit states

Index Combination
FLS-1 W + WC+ SS(+) + EQ + Q
fat

FLS-2 W + WC + SS(-) + EQ + Q
fat

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 156 / 242
5.5.2 Section characteristics
5.5.2.1 Effective widths of concrete for verifications
For filler beam decks, the effective widths for verifications and for solicitations are identical.
The theoretical values and the values calculated by ACOBRI are compared in the following
table:

Theoretical (m) ACOBRI (m)
Beam n1 0.3 + 0.674 / 2 = 0.637 0.637
Beam n2 to 5 0.674 0.674
Beam n6 0.674 / 2 + 0.33 = 0.667 0.667

5.5.2.2 Elastic Modulus
Considering the effective width of concrete, the modular ratio and the different states of the
concrete (see chapter 5.5.3.5), the location of elastic neutral axis and the elastic modulus are
calculated for:

- the upper and lower flanges (W
top
and W
bot
) under positive and negative moments,
- the upper side of concrete slab (W
slab
) under positive moment
- the lower side of concrete slab (W
slab
) under negative moment
- the reinforcement (W
rein
).under negative moment.

The location of the elastic neutral axis (z
el
) is calculated and given about the lower fibre of the
steel section.
The hereunder results are presented according to the state of the slab (Steel section:
HE600A). These theoretical calculations have been carried out with an alternative EXCEL
application for filler beams.

Pouring of concrete:

Theoretical ACOBRI
z
el
(mm) 295 295
Inertia (cm
4
) 141200 141207
W
top
(cm
3
) -4787 -4787
W
bot
(cm
3
) 4787 4787
Theoretical values from ARCELOR sales program for HE600A.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 157 / 242

Under positive moments, the compressed part of concrete being considered

Results for girder n2 (effective width l = 0.674 m)

Theoretical ACOBRI
n
eq
15.22 6.31 15.22 6.31
z
el
(mm) 402.2 465.8 402.2 465.9
W
top
(cm
3
) -11486 -22480 -11489 -22491
W
bot
(cm
3
) 5532 5991 5531 5991
W
slab
(cm
3
) -100236 -64239 -100255 -64251

Under negative moments, the reinforcement and the compressed part of concrete being
considered


Theoretical ACOBRI
n
eq
15.22 6.31 15.22 6.31
z
el
(mm) 275.4 246.9 NA NA
W
top
(cm
3
) -5473 -5396 -5466 -5390
W
bot
(cm
3
) 6250 7499 6243 7491
W
slab
(cm
3
) 130728 67964 130573 67887
W
rein
(cm
3
) -4055 -4086 -4050 -4082

All deviations are less than 1 %.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 158 / 242
5.5.2.3 Plastic moments
It is to be noted that a positive moment tends to compress the upper face of the concrete
slab (see chapter 2.1) and a negative moment tends to compress the lower face of the slab.
Considering the effective width of the slab, as determined in chapter 5.5.2.1, the plastic
characteristics of the sections will be calculated: the class of the section, the plastic moment,
the location of the neutral axis and factor when relevant.
The material yielding stresses used are:
- concrete: 0.85 f
ck
/
c
= 19.83 MPa
- steel: f
y
/
M0
= 265 MPa
- reinforcement : f
rein
/
v
= 434,8 MPa
With:
f
ck
ck
= 35 MPa.
f
y
y
= 265 MPa
f
rein
: Yield stress of the reinforcement steel. f
rein
=500 MPa
c
c
= 1.5
M0
M0
= 1.0
v
: Partial factor for reinforcement;
v
= 1.15

Principle of calculation:
The plastic moments are calculated considering only the compressed part of the slab.
The part of the slab which is in tension is not considered. When the reinforcements are
in the tension part of the slab, they are considered; when they are in the compressed
part, they are neglected.
This principle is illustrated by the stresses patterns considered for positive moments
and for negative moments.

Figure 68 : Filler beam deck - Positive plastic moment
Effective width
Plastic
neutral
axis
Stresses in the girder Stresses in the slab
fy / M0
- 0,85 fcj / c
0
- fy / M0

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 159 / 242

Figure 69 : Filler beam deck Negative plastic moment

Class of sections:

=
265
235
= 0.942
Section: HE600A

Figure 70 : HE600A section Dimensions

Class of the flanges under compression, according to DIN104 table K.1:

c / t = (300/2 25 13/2) / 25 = 4.74 10 = 9.42

Class of flanges = 1
300
590
25
13
27
Plastic
neutral axis
Stresses patterns
Concrete
- 0,85 fcj / c
0
fsk / v
Steel beam
Reinforcement
fy / M0
- fy / M0

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 160 / 242

Class of the web:

d / t
w
= (590 2 x 25 2 x 27) / 13 = 486 / 13 = 37.4

d / t
w
42 = 39.6

The class of the web under pure compression is 3. According to
DIN 104 K.4.1 (5), this web can be considered as a web of class 2, all its area
being effective.

The girders of this bridge are all considered as Class 2 sections.

Positive moments:
M
PlRd
PNA
bottom fibre of the section and the factor calculated from DIN 104 4.4.1.2 (4) to take
into account the effect of the location of the neutral plastic axis. The results of both
theoretical and ACOBRI calculations are presented hereunder for the girder n2.

Theoretical ACOBRI
z
PNA
(mm) 566.0 566.0
M
plRd
(kNm) 1872.7 1873
0.948 0.949

In all sections, the Plastic neutral axis is located 3 mm above the lower face of the
upper flange. It is then not located in the web. A warning massage is well displayed
after the end of the calculations, and also in the calculation sheet, chapter synthesis.

Negative moments:
M
PlRd
PNA
bottom fibre of the section. No factor is applied for negative moment. The results of
both theoretical and ACOBRI calculations are presented hereunder for the girder n2.

Theoretical ACOBRI
z
PNA
(mm) 172.8 172.8
M
plRd
(kNm) 1758.6 1764

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 161 / 242
5.5.2.4 Shear area
The expression of the shear area is given by the following relation:
A
v
= A 2 b t
f
+ (t
w
+ 2 r) t
f

Figure 71 : Shear section

The theoretical value calculated for the three files of girders and the values obtained with
ACOBRI are compared in the following table:

HE600A
Theoretical value (cm
2
) RV 93.25
ACOBRI result (cm
2
) CS 93.21

Shear section Av
b
r
tw
tf

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 162 / 242
5.5.3.1 Deflection of the rail track
The deflection of the rail track is calculated at the rail track axis and the limit of deflection is
obtained from DIN 101 G.3.1.3.2. The verification of the deflection can be summarized by the
following relation:
f f
lim
= L / R
With:
f: deflection of the rail track, calculated at the axis
L: length of the span
R: Value greater than 600, that is either imposed by the user or calculated from
DIN 101 Figure G.3.
The ratio associated to this criterion is = f / f
lim
.
The speed of trains considered is equal to V = 220 km/h. So according to DIN 101 Figure
G.3, L / = 1100.
The bridge is a continuous two spans bridge, so that the value of L / d is to be multiplied by
0.7. The comfort acceleration is defined by b
v
= 1,1 m/s2 and the value of L / should be
divided by b
v
. And at last, the length of the span is L = 12 m. So that the limit for the
deflection of the rail track can be calculated as follow:
f
lim
= L / R = 12 / (1100 x 0,7 / 1,1) = 12 / 700 = 17,1 mm
It is to be noted that is the same conditions, the ENV rules to a value of R = 606, so that f
lim

would have been equal to 19.8 mm.
The results obtained for the checked sections of the rail track are given hereunder:

ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span (%)
1 1 0,000 0,000
3 1 0,211 0,212 0,36%
8 1 0,431 0,433 0,42%
13 1 0,165 0,166 0,30%
15 1-2 0,000 0,000
17 2 0,165 0,166 0,30%
22 2 0,431 0,433 0,42%
27 2 0,211 0,212 0,36%
29 2 0,000 0,000
The comparison shows a very good accuracy of ACOBRI (all deviations less than 1%).

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 163 / 242

Figure 72 : Rail track deflection
Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios for LM71 Load case

5.5.3.2 Deck twist
The deck twist is controlled by verifying in each section of the rails track the following
relation:
g g
lim

Where:
g is the deck twist under LM 71 load case, multiplied by the dynamic factor (see
chapter 5.3.2.1). The definition of g is given in Figure 73.

Figure 73 : Deck twist
g rail track axis
Section
1.5 m
1.5 m
0,00
0,05
0,10
0,15
0,20
0,25
0,30
0,35
0,40
0,45
0,50
0,00 5,0 10,0 15,0 20,0 25,0
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 164 / 242
g
lim
is the limit for the deck twist. Because the speed of the train is assumed to be in the
interval V > 200 km/h, the limit of the deck twist is defined by DIN 101 G.3.1.2.2 as:
g
lim
= 1.5 mm.
The ratio for this criterion is defined by: = g / g
lim
.
The results obtained for the checked sections of the rail track are given hereunder:

ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span (%)
1 1 0,140 0,140 -0,01%
3 1 0,236 0,235 -0,45%
8 1 0,069 0,046 -33,52%
13 1 0,212 0,211 -0,68%
15 1-2 0,144 0,144 -0,05%
17 2 0,212 0,211 -0,68%
22 2 0,069 0,046 -33,52%
27 2 0,236 0,235 -0,45%
29 2 0,140 0,140 -0,01%
The important deviations obtained in sections 8 and 22 are due to the difference of
calculation methods and are obtained for non significant values.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 165 / 242

Figure 74 : Deck twist
Comparison of ANSYS and ACOBRI ratios for LM71 Load case

0,0
0,1
0,1
0,2
0,2
0,3
0 5 10 15 20 25
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 166 / 242

5.5.3.3 Angular rotations at the end of the deck
The angular rotations at the ends of the deck are controlled by verifying at each end of the
rails track the following relation:

lim

Where:
: Angular rotation of the deck, calculated at the rail track axis, for LM71 load case
multiplied by the dynamic coefficient (see chapter 5.3.2.1).
lim
: Limit of the angular rotation of the deck, calculated according to DIN101
G.3.1.2.3. For this bridge, with a single rail track, the limit is:
lim
= 6.5 10
-3
rad.

The values calculated with ANSYS or obtained with ACOBRI are presented in the following
table:

First end Second end
Rotation under LM71 (mrad) 1,719 NA 1,719 NA
Rotation under LM71 (mrad) 2,098 2,12 2,098 2,12
Deviation of results = 1,05 % = 1,05 %
Limit of rotation
lim
(mrad) 6,50 6,50 6,50 6,50

From DIN 104 K 5.2 (1), the minimum reinforcement of the slab if verified with the relation:
s
1.0 %
With:
s
: reinforcement factor; for this bridge,
s
= 1%
In ACOBRI calculation sheet, the here above relation is verified for each section of the
bridge.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 167 / 242
5.5.3.5 Calculation of stresses
For each section and for each combination (see chapter 5.5.1.2), the following steps are
carried out:
- Calculation of the bending moment, excluding the part due to the Weight load
case
- According to the sign of this bending moment, the state of the concrete slab is
determined:
o if the moment is positive:
The upper face of the slab in compression and the lower face in
tension. The lower face is cracked.
o if the moment is negative:
The upper face of the slab is in tension and the lower face in
compression. The reinforcement bars are in tension.
- Calculation of the characteristics of the section for both assumptions (positive
and negative moments): neutral axis location, inertia and elastic modulus.
- The stresses are calculated in the section, according to the state of the slab:
o if the moment is positive:
Normal stresses in upper and lower flanges
Compression stresses in the upper face of concrete
o if the moment is negative:
Normal stresses in upper and lower flanges
Compression stresses in the lower face of concrete
Tension stresses in the reinforcement.

Figure 75 : States of the slab according to the sign of the bending moment

Effective width
Positive bending moment
Negative bending moment
Elastic
neutral axis
Effective width
Elastic
neutral
axis
Part of the slab in
compression
Part of the slab in
traction: not
considered
Reinforcement

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 168 / 242
The SLS combinations considered for the calculations of normal stresses are:

- characteristic combinations for normal stresses in steel girders,
- non frequent combinations for compression in concrete, tension in reinforcement
(cracked concrete).

5.5.3.6 Compression stresses in concrete
The normal stresses in concrete (upper face of the slab under positive moment and lower
face under negative moment) are calculated according to the method described in chapter
5.5.3.5. These stresses are verified with the following criteria:
concrete
< 0.6 f
ck

With:
concrete
: compressive stress in the upper fibre of the concrete slab
f
ck
: limit of compressive strength in concrete.
For the present case, f
ck
= 35 MPa.
The results obtained for the sections of the beam n2 are given hereunder:
Ratio
concrete
=
concrete
/ 0.6 f
y

Upper flange
ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span (%)
1 1 0,001 0,001
3 1 0,212 0,212 -0,17%
8 1 0,354 0,354 -0,04%
13 1 0,198 0,199 0,31%
15 1-2 0,462 0,462 0,10%
17 2 0,199 0,199 0,09%
22 2 0,354 0,354 -0,04%
27 2 0,212 0,212 -0,17%
29 2 0,001 0,001


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 169 / 242

Figure 76 : Stress criteria in concrete Beam n2

5.5.3.7 Tension stresses in reinforcement
The normal stresses in concrete (upper face of the slab under positive moment and lower
face under negative moment) are calculated according to the method described in chapter
5.5.3.5. These stresses are verified with the following criteria:
rein
< 0.8 f
sk

With:
rein
: tension stresses in the upper layer of reinforcement, which takes into account
the increase due to the effects of tension stiffening of concrete:
rein
=
s0
+
s

s
=
s st
ctm
f 4 , 0

and
st
=
a a
I A
I A

f
ctm
: mean tensile strength in concrete, 3.21 MPa for this case
s
: reinforcement ratio = 0.01 for this case
A, I: Area and second moment of area of the composite section under negative
moment
A
a
, I
a
: Area and second moment of area of the steel section.
f
sk
: yielding stress for reinforcement steel. In this case, f
sk
= 500 MPa.
Ratio:
rein
=
rein
/ (0.8 f
sk
)
0,00
0,05
0,10
0,15
0,20
0,25
0,30
0,35
0,40
0,45
0,50
0,0 5,0 10,0 15,0 20,0 25,0
ANSYS M>0
ANSYS M<0
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 170 / 242

Upper flange
ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span (%)
1 1 0,137 0,000
3 1 0,000 0,000
8 1 0,163 0,160 -1,79%
13 1 0,330 0,327 -0,95%
15 1-2 0,602 0,599 -0,46%
17 2 0,330 0,327 -1,06%
22 2 0,164 0,160 -2,24%
27 2 0,000 0,000
29 2 0,137 0,000

All deviations are less than 1%, except for the section at the abutments. The difference is
due to threshold effects, with small value of moments, that leads or not to take into account
the effect of the tension stiffening of the concrete.

Figure 77 : Stress criteria in reinforcement Beam n2

0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0,70
0,0 5,0 10,0 15,0 20,0 25,0
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 171 / 242
5.5.3.8 Normal stresses in steel girders
The normal stresses are calculated in the upper flange and in the lower flange according to
the method described in chapter 5.5.3.5. These stresses are verified with the following
criteria:
top
<
ser , M
y
f
bot
<
ser , M
y
f

With:

top
,
bot
: normal stresses in the upper and the lower flange respectively
M,ser
M,ser
= 1.00
f
y
: yielding stress.

The thickness of the flanges is equal to 25 mm (HE600A). For this thickness and for S275
steel grade, according to EN 10113-3 used in ACOBRI, the yielding stress is f
y
= 265 MPa.

Ratio
top
=
top

M,ser
/ f
y

Upper flange Lower flange
Section Span (%) (%)
1 1 0,001 0 0,001 0,0005
3 1 0,132 0,131 -0,60% 0,269 0,2685 -0,25%
8 1 0,197 0,196 -0,34% 0,424 0,423 -0,32%
13 1 0,283 0,283 -0,15% 0,229 0,229 0,00%
15 1-2 0,716 0,714 -0,30% 0,590 0,589 -0,23%
17 2 0,284 0,283 -0,30% 0,229 0,229 -0,13%
22 2 0,197 0,196 -0,34% 0,424 0,423 -0,32%
27 2 0,132 0,131 -0,60% 0,269 0,2685 -0,25%
29 2 0,001 0 0,001 0,0005


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 172 / 242

Figure 78 : Stress criteria in upper flange Beam n2

Figure 79 : Stress criteria in lower flange Beam n2
0,0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,0 5,0 10,0 15,0 20,0 25,0
ANSYS
ACOBRI
0,0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,0 5,0 10,0 15,0 20,0 25,0
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 173 / 242
5.5.4.1 Shear force
The resistance to shear force under ULS combinations is verified in each section by the
following relation:
V
Ed
< V
plRd

With:
V
Ed
: Shear force in the section under the considered combination of load cases.
V
plRd
: Resistant shear force, given by the relation:
V
plRd
=
3
f A
0 M
y v

A
v
: Shear section as calculated in 5.5.2.4. Av = 93.25 cm
2

So: V
plRd
= 1427 kN
M0
: Partial factor for resistance of cross-sections;
M0
= 1.0
=
plRd
Ed
V
V

The results obtained for the sections of girder n2 are given hereunder:

Forces Ratios
Section Span V V (%)
1 R 1 357,8 359,7 0,251 0,252 0,49%
3 L 1 297,6 297,0 0,209 0,208 -0,29%
3 R 1 238,9 237,8 0,167 0,167 -0,28%
8 L 1 148,2 146,0 0,104 0,102 -1,81%
8 R 1 195,6 196,6 0,137 0,138 0,64%
13 L 1 424,4 416,7 0,297 0,292 -1,85%
13 R 1 482,8 479,9 0,338 0,337 -0,41%
15 L 1 543,9 541,9 0,381 0,380 -0,32%
15 R 2 543,9 541,9 0,381 0,380 -0,32%
17 L 2 482,8 479,9 0,338 0,337 -0,41%
17 R 2 424,4 416,7 0,297 0,292 -1,85%
22 L 2 195,6 196,6 0,137 0,138 0,64%
22 R 2 148,2 146,0 0,104 0,102 -1,81%
27 L 2 238,9 237,8 0,167 0,167 -0,28%

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 174 / 242
27 R 2 297,6 297,0 0,209 0,208 -0,29%
29 L 2 357,8 359,7 0,251 0,252 0,49%


5.5.4.2 Positive bending moment
It has been proven in 5.5.2.3 that all sections are class 2 under a positive moment. So
M
Ed
< M
plRd

With:
M
Ed
: Positive bending moment in the section under the considered combination of
load cases.
M
plRd
: Positive resistant bending moment (see chapter 5.5.2.3).
: Factor calculated according to DIN 104 4.4.1.2 (4) to take into account the
location of the plastic neutral axis (see chapter 5.5.2.3).
=
plRd
Ed
M
M

The results obtained for the sections of girder n2 are given hereunder:

ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span (%)
1 1 0,001 0,0005
3 1 0,316 0,316 -0,09%
8 1 0,492 0,493 0,07%
13 1 0,000 0
15 1-2 0,000 0
17 2 0,000 0
22 2 0,492 0,493 0,07%
27 2 0,316 0,316 -0,09%
29 2 0,001 0,0005

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 175 / 242

Figure 80 : ELU Bending resistance criteria under positive moments Beam n2

5.5.4.3 Negative bending moment
It has been proven in 5.5.2.3 that all sections are class 2 under a negative moment. So
M
Ed
< M
PlRd

With:
M
Ed
load cases.
M
PlRd
: Negative resistant bending moment (see chapter 5.5.2.3).
=
PlRd
Ed
M
M

0,0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,0 5,0 10,0 15,0 20,0 25,0
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 176 / 242

ANSYS ACOBRI
Section Span (%)
1 1 0,001 0
3 1 0,000 0
8 1 0,000 0
13 1 0,297 0,2965 -0,32%
15 1-2 0,718 0,714 -0,58%
17 2 0,297 0,2965 -0,32%
22 2 0,000 0
27 2 0,000 0
29 2 0,001 0

Figure 81 : ELU Bending resistance criteria under negative moments Beam n2

0,0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,0 5,0 10,0 15,0 20,0 25,0
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 177 / 242
5.5.5.1 Damage equivalent factor
The damage equivalence factor is calculated according to DIN 103: 2003 9.5.3, with the
following relation:
=
1

2

3

4

max

Parameters:
Type of traffic: EC MIX
Volume of traffic: 25 10
6
t/year
Calculation of
1
:

Span
Span
Length (m)
1
from Tab. II
9-3
1 at midspan 12 0.826
1-2 at support 12 0.826
2 at midspan 12 0.826

Calculation of
2
, from Tab II-9.6:
2
= 1.00
Calculation of
3
, from Tab II-9.7:
3
= 1.00
Calculation of
4
:
4
= 1.00 (only one railway track)
Calculation of
max
:
max
= 1.4
Eventually, = 0.826 for each section of the bridge.

Values calculated by ACOBRI for each section: = 0.826

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 178 / 242
5.5.5.2 Stress ranges
The stress ranges in the flanges are calculated for the combination defined in chapter
5.5.1.4, according to DIN 104 4.9.4.1 (3):
E
=
2
|
maxf

minf
|
With:
2
: Dynamic factor for railways bridges, calculated for a carefully maintained track
(DIN 101 6.4.3.2).
2
= as calculated in chapter 5.3.2.1
: Damage equivalent factor
maxf
: Maximal stress in the flange under LM71 load, taking into account the sign of
the moment
minf
: Minimal stress in the flange under LM71 load, taking into account the sign of
the moment
The stress ranges in the flanges are verified according to DIN 104 4.9.6 with the following
relation:
Ff

E

c
/
Mf

And the ratio can be expressed with the formula:
f
=
Ff

Mf

E
/
c

With:
Ff
: Partial factor for equivalent constant amplitude stress range
Mf
: Partial factor for fatigue strength
c
: Reference value of the fatigue strength at 2 million cycles
For the studied bridge:
Ff
= 1.0
Mf
= 1.35
c
= 160 MPa for upper flange (no studs)
c
= 160 MPa for lower flange

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 179 / 242
5.5.5.3 Stress ranges in upper flanges
The results obtained by ANSYS and by for the beam n2 are compared in the following table:

Section Span
E

E

f

f
(%)
1 1 0,31 0,00 0,003 0
3 1 10,11 10,05 0,085 0,085 -0,39%
8 1 24,48 23,75 0,207 0,2 -3,19%
13 1 46,32 45,88 0,391 0,387 -0,97%
15 1-2 62,25 61,70 0,525 0,521 -0,80%
17 2 46,32 45,88 0,391 0,387 -0,97%
22 2 24,48 23,75 0,207 0,2 -3,19%
27 2 10,11 10,05 0,085 0,085 -0,39%
29 2 0,31 0,00 0,003 0

The comparison shows a very good accuracy of the ACOBRI results (all deviations are less
than 1%), which can also be seen on the following figure:

Figure 82 : ELF Stress range criteria for upper flange Beam n2

0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0 5 10 15 20 25
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 180 / 242
5.5.5.4 Stress ranges in lower flanges
The results obtained by ANSYS and by for the beam n2 are compared in the following table:

Section Span
E

E

f

f
(%)
1 1 0,38 0,00 0,003 0
3 1 37,95 37,74 0,320 0,318 -0,68%
8 1 71,63 71,23 0,604 0,601 -0,55%
13 1 34,29 33,85 0,289 0,286 -1,15%
15 1-2 44,79 44,40 0,378 0,375 -0,77%
17 2 34,29 33,85 0,289 0,286 -1,15%
22 2 71,63 71,23 0,604 0,601 -0,55%
27 2 37,95 37,74 0,320 0,318 -0,68%
29 2 0,38 0,00 0,003 0

The comparison shows a very good accuracy of the ACOBRI results (all deviations are less
than 1%), which can also be seen on the following figure:

Figure 83 : ELF Stress range criteria for lower flange Beam n2

0,00
0,10
0,20
0,30
0,40
0,50
0,60
0,70
0 5 10 15 20 25
ANSYS
ACOBRI

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 181 / 242
6 REFERENCE RAILWAY BRIDGE UNDER EN RULES
REFERENCE RAILWAY BRIDGE UNDER EN RULES
Railway bridge Eurocode EN rules
Filler beam deck Six beams, two spans
See chapter 5.1
See chapter 5.1
File: RAILS_EN_1.APM

When not explained in this chapter, the reference values used hereafter are justified in the
chapter 5.
6.2 FE Modelisation

Effective width of concrete (m)
Reference ACOBRI
Beam n1 0.637 0.637
Beam n2 to 5 0.674 0.674
Beam n6 0.667 0.667


Modular ratio
Reference ACOBRI
Dead loads
15.22 15.22

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 182 / 242
6.2.3 Masses

Reference ACOBRI
Overlength (mm) 2 x 200 2 x 200
3
) 67.49 67.5
Mass of formworks (kg) 8747 8740
Mass of the track 2935 2936

6.3.1 Dead loads
Results are verified for the following sections of the second beam:
- section 8 (mid-span of the first span)
- section 15 (intermediate support between the two spans)
6.3.1.1 Weight
Bending moment
Ref. ACOBRI Section Span
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
8 1 -120,0 -119,1 -0,78
15 1-2 238,0 235,7 -0,97

Shear force

On the left (kN)
Section Span Ref. ACOBRI (%)
8 1 14,2 14,1
15 1-2 93,5 92,7

A good accuracy of results can be observed.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 183 / 242
6.3.1.2 Cantilevering weight
Bending moment
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
8 1 -10,3 -10.3 -
15 1-2 24,1 24.1 -

Shear force

On the left (kN)
8 1 0,98 0.98 -
15 1-2 10,86 10.97 +1.01

A very good accuracy of results can be observed. The deviations keep always less than
1.0%.

Bending moment
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
8 1 -67,0 -66.8 -0.3
15 1-2 132,0 131.3 -0.5

Shear force

On the left (kN)
8 1 7,97 7.94 -0.38
15 1-2 50,94 50.80 -0.28

A very good accuracy of results can be observed.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 184 / 242
The effects of the load of the ballast are multiplied by 1.3 and the effects of the load of the
waterproof layer by 1.2. ANSYS calculations are carried out and its results are compared
with the ACOBRI results in the hereunder tables.
Bending moment
ANSYS
ACOBRI
Section Span
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
8 1 -85,95 -85,78 -0,20%
15 1-2 168,95 168,57 -0,22%

Shear force

On the left (kN)
Section Span ANSYS ACOBRI (%)
8 1 10,23 10,2 -0,29%
15 1-2 65,42 65,25 -0,26%


Bending moment
ANSYS ACOBRI Section Span
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
8 1 -47,96 -47,84 -0,25%
15 1-2 94,27 94,02 -0,27%

Shear force

On the left (kN)
Section Span ANSYS ACOBRI (%)
8 1 5,71 5,68 -0,53%
15 1-2 36,46 36,36 -0,27%


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 185 / 242
6.3.1.6 Equipment
Bending moment
(kNm) (kNm) (%)
8 1 -20,4 -20.4 -
15 1-2 41,1 41.0 -0.09

Shear force

On the left (kN)
8 1 1,87 1.87 -
15 1-2 10,62 10.61 -0.24

A very good accuracy of results can be observed. The deviation keeps always less than %.

6.3.2 Live loads
Bending moment

Section Span ANSYS ACOBRI (%) ANSYS ACOBRI (%)
8 1 120,72 120,64 -0,07% -364,96 -364,61 -0,09%
15 1-2 410,12 409,64 -0,12% 0,00 0,00

A very good accuracy of results can be observed (deviations less than 1%).

Shear force


8 1 61,94 61,79 -0,25% 76,40 76,18 -0,28%
15 1-2 185,53 186,21 0,37% 0,00 0,00

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 186 / 242

8 1 -16,24 -16,05 -1,15% -5,39 -5,78 7,18%
15 1-2 0,00 0,00 -185,53 -186,21 0,37%

A good accuracy of results can be observed.

Bending moment

Section Span RV ACOBRI (%) RV ACOBRI (%)
8 1 135,49 136,11 0,46% -411,34 -411,23 -0,03%
15 1-2 550,48 549,95 -0,10% 0,00 0,00

A very good accuracy of results can be observed (all deviations less than 1%).

Shear force

8 1 70,42 70,08 -0,48% 84,90 84,46 -0,52%
15 1-2 224,59 223,60 -0,44% 0,00 0,00


8 1 -15,67 -15,36 -1,99% -5,00 -4,93 -1,33%
15 1-2 0,00 0,00 -223,37 -223,60 0,10%

A good accuracy of results can be observed (significant values less than 1%).

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 187 / 242
6.3.3 Eigen mode
frequency of the first
eigenmode
Reference ACOBRI
Dead loads
6.11 Hz 6.11 Hz

6.4.1.1 Deflection of the rail track
The deflection of the rail track is verified in ACOBRI according to Annex A2 of EN 1990.
The speed of the trains is considered here equal to 200 km/h. The span length is 12 m. So
according to Figure A2.3 of EN 1990, L / = 1000.
b
v
= 1 m/s
2
so the value of L / does not need to be changed.
The bridge is a two continuous spans bridge, so that the value of L / has to be multiplied by
0.7, so that L / = 700.
Actually, the limit for the deflection is:
f
lim
= 12 / 700 = 17.14 mm
Limit of the deflection given by ACOBRI: 17.1 mm
6.4.1.2 Stress limits
According to EN 1994-2:2005 7.2.2, the following verifications have to be carried out:
- Concrete: characteristic combinations:
c
k
1
f
ck
where k
1
= 0.6
- Reinforcement: characteristic combinations:
r
k
3
f
sk
where k
3
= 0.8
r
is calculated according to EN1994-2:2005 7.4.3 (3):
r
=
r0
+
avec: =
s st
ctm
f 4 . 0

- Lower and upper flanges: characteristic combinations:
Ed
f
y
/
M,ser

The section properties, the forces and the moments are read from the calculation sheet of
ACOBRI. The stress limits are obtained from the following values:

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 188 / 242
Concrete: f
ck
= 35 MPa and f
ctm
= 3.21 MPa
Steel: f
y
= 345 MPa
Reinforcement: f
sk
= 500 MPa
Partial coefficient:
Mser
= 1.0
The reference calculations are carried out in an EXCEL sheet (ELS Contraintes Section 8
- 15.xls) and their results are compared hereunder with the ACOBRI results.

Compression stress in the concrete
Design value
c
(MPa) 7.6 7.6 9.9 8.89
Stress limit k
1
f
ck
(MPa) 21 21 21 21
Tension stress in the reinforcement
Design value
r
(MPa) 67.3 67.3 245.7 247.74
Stress limit k
3
f
sk
(MPa) 400 400 400 400
Design value
t
(MPa) 53.0 53.0 194.0 194.03
Stress limit f
y
/
Mser
(MPa) 345 345 345 345
Design value
t
(MPa) 114.6 114.6 160.1 160.09
Stress limit f
y
/
Mser
(MPa) 345 345 345 345


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 189 / 242
7 VALIDATION OF PARAMETERS
The aim of this chapter is to verify the value of the following parameters calculated by
ACOBRI before the general calculation of the bridge:

- The masses of the different parts of the bridge
- The moments of inertia considered in the calculations
- Other parameters

Test index 1 2 2s 3 4 5b 5p 6 7
Type of bridge
Road bridge X X X x
Footbridge X x x
Railways bridge x
Rules
French rules X x x
DIN X X x x
ENV X
Type of section
Normal section x x x x
Box girders x x
Prefabricated composite beams x
Box girders filled with concrete x
Filler beam deck x
Cantilevering x
Reinforced section x
Slab with concrete haunches x x
Slab with concrete planks x
Slab with steel sheeting x
Validation (number of values
verified)

Effective widths of concrete slabs 2 2 3
Modular ratio 6 6 8
Moments of flexural inertia 6 18 18 24 10 4 4
Moments of torsional inertia 6 28 24 10
Masses of steel beams 2 2 2 3 2
Volume and masses of concrete 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Masses of structures 6
Masses of equipments 2
Reactions 6 2 4
Light concrete modular ratio 2

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 190 / 242
7.1 Test n1 Normal beams
TEST N1
Road bridge French rules
Normal beams Two beams, single span
Length = 15 m
3

Section of the beams: HEA800
A footway on each side of the slab. Footway width = 1 m.
Main parameters of the load :
3

3

3

Parapet: One on the left side, y = 1m and q = 250 kN/m
Gutter: One on the right side, y = 1.5 m and q = 100 kN/m
File: TEST_1.APM
Values to be verified :
Moments of inertia during the several phases.
Masses. Reactions on the abutments under dead loads.

References values:

Moments of inertia:

Effective width of the slab = 3m on all the length of the structure

Flexural inertia
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
(cm
4
)
Construction phase 303400 (1) 596.9 (1)
Dead loads phase 783553 (2) 44000 (3)
Live loads phase 997581 (2) 130805 (4)

(1) : from ARCELOR catalogue
(2) : from EXCEL sheet
(3) : 596.7 + 300*25
3
/6/18 = 43999.8
(4) : 596.7 + 300*25
3
/6/6 = 130805

Masses:

Area of the section: 285.8 mm
2

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 191 / 242
Corrected mass of steel: 7850x2x(15+0.4)x0.02858 = 6910 kg
Volume of concrete: 15x8x0.25 = 30 m
3

Mass of concrete: 2500x30 = 75000 kg
Mass of waterproof layer: (8-2x1)x15x0.03x2600 = 7020 kg
Footways: 2x1x15x0.2x2400 = 14400 kg
Roadway surfacing: (8-2)x15x0.075x2350 = 15862 kg
Parapet: 250x15 = 3750 kN
Gutter: 100x15 = 1500 kN

Reactions on abutments:

Self weight: (75000+6731) x 9.81 = 801.8 kN
Structures: (14400+7020+15862) x 9.81 = 365.7 kN
Equipments: 5250 kN

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 192 / 242
ACOBRI values:

Moments of inertia:

Flexural inertia
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
(cm
4
)
RV 303400 596.9
CS 303440 597 Construction phase
PP 303440 597
RV 783553 44000
CS 783553 43999.7 Dead loads phase
PP 783553 44000
RV 997581 130805
CS 997581 130805.2 Live loads phase
PP 997581 130805

Masses:

RV CS PP
Overlength (mm) 400 400
3
) 30 30
Waterproof layer mass (kg) 7020 7020 7020
Footways mass (kg) 14400 14400 14400
Roadway surfacing mass (kg) 15862 15863 15860
Parapet (kN) 3.75 3.75
Gutter (kN) 1.5 1.5

Reactions on abutments:

RV CS PP
Self weight (kN) 801.8 801.8 801.8
Structure (kN) 365.7 365.8 365.7
Equipment (kN) 5250 5250 5250

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 193 / 242
7.2 Test n2 Box girders
7.2.1 DIN Rules
TEST N2
Road bridge DIN German rules
Box girders Two beams, two spans
Lengths: span 1 = 15 m; span 2 = 12 m.
3

Concrete haunch height = 10 cm
Concrete class : C35/45; Relative humidity RH = 80 %
Reinforcement ratio = 1.2% (67% top, 33% bottom)
Top
Stud diameter = 19 mm
Section of the beams: HEB900
A footway on each side of the slab. Footway width = 1.5 m.
Main parameters of the load :
3

3

3

File: TEST_2.APM
Effective widths of the slab. Modular ratio.
Masses.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 194 / 242
References values:

Effective widths of the slab:

For each span, the effective width of the concrete slab is given by the following
relation:

l
i
= b
0
+ b
1
/ 4

For DIN rules and an end span: b
1
b
0
is the transverse spacing between two studs. Because the stud repartition is
not known at this point of the calculations, the following relation is used:

b
0
= b
f
2.5 d
s

Where b
f
s
the stud diameter.

So: Span 1: l
1
= 2 x 0.3 2.5 x 0.019 + 0.85 x 15 / 4 = 3.74 m
Span 2: l
2
= 2 x 0.3 2.5 x 0.019 + 0.85 x 12 / 4 = 3.10 m

Modular ratio:

ck
= 35 MPa
cm
= 9500 (f
ck
+ 8)
1/3
E
cm
= 33282 MPa
0
= E
a
/ E
cm
= 6.31
c
= 10x0.25 = 2.5 m
2

Notional size: h
0
= 2 A
c
/ u = 244 mm
cm
=f
ck
+ 8 = 43 MPa
1
= (35/f
cm
)
0.7
= 0.866
2
= (35/f
cm
)
0.2
= 0.960

RH
= a2 [1 + a1 (1 RH/100) / (0.10
3
0
h )] = 1.295
cm
) = 16.8 /
cm
f = 2.56
0
) = 1 / (0.1 + t
0
0.2
)
c
(t - t
0
) = 1 for t =
Creep coefficient:
t
=
0

c
(t-t
0
)
0
=
RH
(f
cm
) (t
0
)
Modular ratio: n
eq
= n
0
(1 +
L

t
)

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 195 / 242
So, with the recommended values of DIN, adopted for this test, the reference
values of the modular ratio are:

Recommended values Reference
values

L
t
0
(t
0
)
0
n
eq

Shrinkage and thermal 0.55 1 0.909 2.855 16.216
Dead loads 1.1 45 0.446 1.410 16.034
Live loads 0 / / / 6.31

Moments of flexural inertia:

Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
Construction phase 988200 (1) 988200 (1)
Shrinkage and thermal 2496958 1478243
Dead loads phase 2506804 1478243
Shrinkage and thermal 2337856 1403571
Dead loads phase 2347346 1403571

(2) : all other values from alternative EXCEL sheet

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 196 / 242
Torsional inertia:

The theoretical value for the steel box girder is given by the following expression:

I
Ts
=
e
ds
2
4

With:

= b
f
x (h
t
t
f
) = 2595 cm
2

e
ds
= 2 (b
f
/t
f
+ (h
t
t
f
)/t
w
) = 110.7

So:

I
Ts
= 243421 cm
4

For the composite section, the theoretical expression of the torsionnal inertia is
given by:

I
T
= I
Ts
+ L
Slab
E
Slab
/ (6 n
eq
)

With:

L
Slab
: Effective width of the concrete slab
E
Slab
: Effective thickness of the slab
n
eq
: Modular ratio

So that for the parameters of test 2, the reference values are:

Outside the cracked zone
In the
cracked
zone
Loads n
eq
L = 3.74 m L = 3.10 m /
Construction phase / 243421 243421 243421
Shrinkage and thermal 16.21 303483 293205 243421
Dead loads phase 16.03 304164 293770 243421
Live loads phase 6.31 397773 371360 243421

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 197 / 242
Masses:

Area of the section: HEB900: 371.3 mm
2

Corrected mass of steel: 7850x4x(27+0.4)x0.037130 = 31945 kg
3

Volume of concrete haunch:27x2x0.1x0.6 = 3.24 m
3

Total volume of concrete: 67.5 + 3.24 = 70.74 m
3


Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 198 / 242
ACOBRI values:


RV CS
Span 1 3.74 3.74
Span 2 3.10 3.10

Modular ratio:

RV CS PP
Shrinkage and thermal 16.216 16.22 16.22
Dead loads 16.034 16.03 16.03
Live loads 6.31 6.31 6.31


Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Construction phase 988200 988125 988125 /
Shrinkage and thermal 2496958 2496959 2496959
Dead loads phase 2506804 25006691 25006691
Live loads phase 3319113 3319157 3319157
1478243 1477510 1477510
Dead loads phase 2347346 2347910 2347910
Live loads phase 3160589 3161326 3161326
1403571 1403246 1403246

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 199 / 242
Moments of torsional inertia:

Torsional inertia
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
In the cracked zone
(cm
4
)
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Construction phase 243421 243421 243421 243421 243421 243421
Shrinkage and thermal 303483 303483 303483 243421 243421 243421
Dead loads phase 304164 303164 303164 243421 243421 243421
Live loads phase 397773 397781 397781 243421 243421 243421
Dead loads phase 293770 293809 293810 243421 243421 243421
Live loads phase 371360 371469 371470 243421 243421 243421

Masses:

RV CS PP
3
) 70.74 70.7

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 200 / 242
7.2.2 EN Rules
TEST N2EN
Road bridge Eurocode EN
Same bridge as Test 2 but EN rules
File: TEST_2EN.APM
Masses.
RV CS
Span 1 3.74 3.74
Span 2 3.10 3.10
Modular ratio:
RV CS PP
Dead loads 16.034 16.03 16.03
Live loads 6.31 6.31 6.31
Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Construction phase 988200 988125 988125 /
Dead loads phase 2506804 25006691 25006691
Live loads phase 3319113 3319157 3319157
1478243 1477510 1477510
Dead loads phase 2347346 2347910 2347910
Live loads phase 3160589 3161326 3161326
1403571 1403246 1403246

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 201 / 242
Torsional inertia
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
In the cracked zone
(cm
4
)
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Dead loads phase 304164 303164 303164 243421 243421 243421
Live loads phase 397773 397781 397781 243421 243421 243421
Dead loads phase 293770 293809 293810 243421 243421 243421
Live loads phase 371360 371469 371470 243421 243421 243421
Masses:
RV CS PP
3
) 70.74 70.7

7.2.3 Symmetrical configuration of the DIN bridge
TEST N2S
Road bridge DIN German rules
All parameters are the same as for test 2, but:
File: TEST_2s.APM
Masses.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 202 / 242
References values:
Reference values are the same than the ones calculated for test 2
ACOBRI values:
RV CS
Span 1 3.1025 3.10
Span 2 3.74 3.74
Modular ratio:
RV CS PP
Dead loads 16.034 16.03 16.03
Live loads 6.31 6.31 6.31
Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Construction phase 988200 988125 988125 / / /
Span 1 Effective width of slab = 3.10 m
Dead loads phase 2347346 2347910 2347910
Live loads phase 3160589 3161326 3161326
1403571 1403246 1403246
Span 2 Effective width of slab = 3.74 m
Dead loads phase 2506804 25006691 25006691
Live loads phase 3319113 3319157 3319157
1478243 1477510 1477510
Masses:
RV CS PP
3
) 70.74 70.7

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 203 / 242
7.3 Test n3 Prefabricated composite girders
7.3.1 Eurocode ENV Rule
TEST N3
Footbridge Eurocodes ENV rules
Prefabricated composite girders Two beams, three spans
Lengths: span 1 = 15 m; span 2 = 18 m: span 3 = 15 m.
3

Prefabricated slab depth = 10 cm
Concrete class : C25/35; Relative humidity RH = 65 %
Reinforcement ratio = 1.% (67% top, 33% bottom)
Top
Section of the beams: IPE600
File: TEST_3.APM

References values:
For each span, the effective width of the span is given by the following relation:
l
i
= b
0
+ b
1
/ 4
For ENV rules:
- b
1
= 0.8 x length of an end span
- b
1
= 0.7 x length of an intermediate span
b
0
is the transverse spacing between two studs. Because the stud repartition is
not known at this point of the calculations, the following relation is used:
b
0
= b
f
2.5 d
s

Where b
f
s
the stud diameter.
So: Spans 1 and 3: l
1
= 0.22 2.5 x 0.019 + 0.8 x 15 / 4 = 3.17 m
Span 2: l
2
= 0.22 2.5 x 0.019 + 0.7 x 18 / 4 = 3.32 m

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 204 / 242
But with consideration of the available width of the slab, the effective widths
should be:
Spans 1 and 3: l
1
= 3.17/2 + 1.0 = 2.59 m
Span 2: l
2
= 3.32/2 + 1.0 = 2.66 m
Modular ratio:
ck
= 25 MPa
cm
= 9500 (f
ck
+ 8)
1/3
E
cm
= 30472 MPa
0
= E
a
/ E
cm
= 6.89
c
= 6x0.2 = 1.2 m
2

Notional size: h
0
= 2 A
c
/ u = 193.6mm
cm
=f
ck
+ 8 = 33 MPa
1
= 1
2
= 1

RH
=
2
[1 +
1
(1 RH/100) / (0.10
3
0
h )] = 1.605
cm
) = 16.8 /
cm
f = 2.92
0
) = 1 / (0.1 + t
0
0.2
)
c
(t - t
0
) = 1 for t =
Creep coefficient:
t
=
0

c
(t-t
0
)
0
=
RH
(f
cm
) (t
0
)
Modular ratio: n
eq
= n
0
(1 +
L

t
)
So, with the recommended values of ENV, adopted for this test, the reference
values of the modular ratio are:

Adopted values Reference
values

L
t
0
(t
0
)
0
n
eq

Shrinkage and thermal 0.54 1 0.909 4.27 22.77
Dead loads 1.15 45 0.446 2.09 23.49
Live loads 0 / / / 6.89

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 205 / 242

n
eq

Flexural
inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural
inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
Construction phase 23.49 172133 109891
Shrinkage and thermal 22.77 247723 162458
Dead loads phase 23.49 245609 162458
Live loads phase 6.89 323834 162458
Construction phase 23.49 173397 110324
Dead loads phase 23.49 247420 163888

Note: all values from EXCEL sheet


n
eq

Torsional
inertia
M+
(cm
4
) (1)
Flexural
inertia
M-
(cm
4
) (2)
Construction phase 23.49 2003 165.4
Shrinkage and thermal 22.77
14867
165.4
Dead loads phase 23.49
15332
165.4
Live loads phase 6.89
50286
165.4
Construction phase 23.49 2053 165.4
15264
165.4
15741
165.4
51641
165.4

Note: (1): values from EXCEL sheet
(2): from ARCELOR catalogue

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 206 / 242

ACOBRI values:


RV CS
Spans 1 and 3 2.59 2.59
Span 2 2.66 2.66

Modular ratio:

RV CS PP
Dead loads 23.49 23.49 23.49
Live loads 6.89 6.89 6.89
Construction phase 23.49 23.49 23.49

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 207 / 242

Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
n
eq
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Spans 1 and 3: Effective width of slab = 2.58 m
Construction phase 23.49 172133 172062 172062 109891 109868 109868
Dead loads phase 23.49 245609 245507 245507
Live loads phase 6.89 323834 323732 323732
162458 162381 162381
Construction phase 23.49 173397 173413 173417 110324 110332 110332
Dead loads phase 23.49 247420 247448 247448
Live loads phase 6.89 325450 325464 325464
163888 163913 163913


Torsional inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
n
eq
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Construction phase 23.49 2003 2000 2000 165.4 165.4 165
15332
15308 15308
14867
14845 14845
50286
50202 50202
165.4 165.4 165
Construction phase 23.49 2053 2053 2054 165.4 165.4 165
15741
15747 15747
15264
15270 15270
51641
51653 51653
165.4 165.4 165

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 208 / 242
7.3.2 Eurocode EN Rule
TEST N3EN
Footbridge Eurocodes EN rules
Prefabricated composite girders Two beams, three spans
Same bridge as Test 3 but under EN rules
File: TEST_3EN.APM
References values:
All references values as for Test 3 except:
For each span, the effective width of the span is given by the following relation:
l
i
= b
0
+ b
1
/ 4
For EN rules: b
1
= 0.85 x length of an end span (and not 0.8 as with ENV)
So for spans 1 and 3: l
1
= 0.22 2.5 x 0.019 + 0.85 x 15 / 4 = 3.36 m
But with consideration of the available width of the slab, the effective widths
should be: l
1
= 3.36/2 + 1.0 = 2.68 m
ACOBRI values:
RV ACOBRI
Spans 1 and 3 2.68 2.68
Span 2 2.66 2.66
Modular ratio:
RV ACOBRI
Shrinkage and thermal 22.77 22.77
Dead loads 23.49 23.49
Construction phase 23.49 23.49

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 209 / 242

Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
n
eq
RV ACOBRI RV ACOBRI
Construction phase 23.49 173397 173417 110324 110332
Dead loads phase 23.49 247420 247448
163888 163913


Torsional inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
n
eq
RV ACOBRI RV ACOBRI
Construction phase 23.49 2053 2054 165.4 165
15741
15747
15264
15270
51641
51653
165.4 165

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 210 / 242
7.4 Test n4 Box girders
TEST N4
Railway bridge French rules
Box girders filled with concrete Two beams, two spans
3

Spacing between the flanges = 10 cm
Reinforcement of the lower flanges on the intermediate pier.
Dimensions of the reinforcement plate: L = 2x2.4= 4.8 m; w = 250 mm; t = 30 mm
Concrete class : C35/45;

Section of the beams: HEB800
One railway line.
Ballast dimensions: mean height = 400 mm; width = 4 m
= 2000 kg/m
3

File: TEST_4.APM

References values:


Flexural inertia
out support
zone (M+)
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
in support zone
(M-)
(cm
4
)
Construction phase 718200 (1) 929260
Dead loads phase 1620883 1253823 (3)
Live loads phase 2229257 1253823 (3)

(2) : all other values from EXCEL sheet
(3) : calculated with an equivalent modular ratio = 100, according to french rules.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 211 / 242

Torsional inertia
out support zone
(M+)
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
in support zone (M-
)
(cm
4
)
Construction phase 1892 (1) 2342 (2)
Dead loads phase 76892 15842 (3)
Live loads phase 226892 15842 (3)

(2) : In support zone: I
t
= 2 (946.0 + b
r
x t
r
3
/ 3) = 2342cm
4

(3) : calculated with an equivalent modular ratio = 100, according to french rules.

Masses:

Area of the section: HEB800: 334.2 mm
2

Total mass of beams: 7850x4x32x0.03342 = 33580 kg
Total mass of plates: 7850x4x4.8x0.25x0.03 = 1130 kg
Corrected mass of beams: 7850x4x(32+0.4)x0.03342 = 34000 kg

3


Inner height of beams: 800-2x33 = 734 mm
Spacing between webs: 300+100-17.5=382.5 mm
Concrete in box girders:
Section: 0.3825x0.734 = 0.281 m
2

Volume: 0.281x2x32 = 17.97 m
3

Masse : 17.97x2350 = 42225 kg
Total masse of concrete: 135360 + 42225 = 177585 kg

Volume of ballast: 32x4x0.4 = 51.2 m
3

Masse of ballast: 2000 x 51.2 = 102400 kg

Reactions on piers and abutments:

Total mass (concrete+steel) : 177585 + 33580 + 1130 = 212290 kg
Self weight sum of reactions: 212290 x 9.81 = 2082.6 kN

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 212 / 242
ACOBRI values:
Flexural inertia
out support zone (M+)
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
in support zone(M-)
(cm
4
)
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Dead loads phase 1620883 1620883 1620883
Live loads phase 2229257 2229257 2229257
1253823 1253823 1253823
Torsional inertia
out support zone (M+)
(cm
4
)
Torsional inertia
in support zone(M-)
(cm
4
)
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Dead loads phase 76892 76892 76892
Live loads phase 226892 226892 226892
15842 15842 15842
Masses:
RV CS PP
Actual mass of beams (kg) 33580
Corrected mass of beams (kg) 34000 33998
Actual mass of plates (kg) 1130 1130
Total mass of steel (kg) 34710 34710
Volume of concrete slab (m
3
) 57.6 57.6
Mass of concrete slab (kg) 135360
Total mass of concrete (kg) 177385 177970
(0.3%)
RV CS PP
Self weight (kN) 2082.6 2086.3 2086.32

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 213 / 242
7.5 Test n5 Steel sheeting and non composite pla nks
7.5.1 Slab with steel sheeting, under DIN rules
TEST N5b
Footbridge DIN rules
Normal beams Slab with steel sheeting Two beams, two spans
3

Concrete class : C35/45; Relative Humidity 80 %
Steel Sheeting COFRAPLUS 60. See dimensions on Figure 84.
Top
Section of the beams: IPE600
File: TEST_5B.APM
Masse and volume of concrete slab.

Figure 84 : Steel sheeting dimensions

References values:

n
eq

Flexural
inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural
inertia
M-
(cm
4
)

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 214 / 242
Masses:
Volume of concrete slab: 30x6x(0.2 - 0.058) = 25.56 m
3
(without the ribs)
Section of one rib: 0.058 x (0.101 + 0.062) / 2 = 0.004727 m
2

Volume of one rib: 0.004727 x 6 = 0.02836 m
3

Number of ribs: n
r
= 30 / 0.207 = 144
Total volume of the ribs: 144 x 0.02836 = 4.08 m
3

Total volume of concrete: 25.56 + 4.08 = 29.64 m
3
(considering the ribs)
ACOBRI values:
Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
n
eq
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Live loads phase 6.31 336623 336626 336626 157090 157032 157032
Masses:
RV CS PP
3
) 29.64 29.7

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 215 / 242
7.5.2 Slab with steel sheeting, under EN rules
TEST N5b EN
Footbridge Eurocode EN rules
Normal beams Slab with steel sheeting Two beams, two spans
Same as test 5b but under Eurocode EN rules
File: TEST_5BEN.APM

Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
n
eq
RV ACOBRI RV ACOBRI
Live loads phase 6.31 336623 336626 157090 157032
Masses:
RV ACOBRI
3
) 29.64 29.7

7.5.3 Slab with non composite concrete planks under DIN rules
TEST N5p
Footbridge DIN rules
Normal beams Non composite planks Two beams, two spans
Same parameters as Test n5b but:
No Steel Sheeting
Non composite Concrete planks of thickness = 58 mm
File: TEST_5P.APM

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 216 / 242
References values:
Moments of flexural inertia: the same as in test 5b

n
eq

Flexural
inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural
inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
Masses:
Volume of concrete slab: 30x6x0.2 = 36 m
3
(without the ribs)
Mass of concrete: 2450x36 = 88200 kg

ACOBRI values:
Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
n
eq
RV CS PP RV CS PP
Live loads phase 6.31 336623 336626 336626 157090 157032 157032
Masses:
RV CS PP
3
) 36 36

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 217 / 242
7.5.4 Slab with non composite concrete planks under EN rules
TEST N5p EN
Footbridge Eurocode EN rules
Normal beams Non composite planks Two beams, two spans
Same parameters as Test n5p but under Eurocode EN rules
File: TEST_5PEN.APM
Flexural inertia
M+
(cm
4
)
Flexural inertia
M-
(cm
4
)
n
eq
RV ACOBRI RV ACOBRI
Live loads phase 6.31 336623 336626 157090 157032
Masses:
RV ACOBRI
3
) 36.0 36.0

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 218 / 242
7.6 Test n6 Filler beam deck
7.6.1 Under DIN rules
TEST N6
Filler beam deck Twelve beams, two spans
Slab: Width = 10 m; Depth of concrete over the beams = 10 cm; = 2475 kg/m
3

One cantilevering on the left. Width 1.5 m, average depth: 0.35 m.
Formwork depth = 0.065 m
Concrete class : C35/45; Relative Humidity 80 %
Reinforcement ratio = 1.%
Section of the beams: HEA800. 12 beams.
File: TEST_6.APM
Reactions on the abutments under dead loads.
References values:
Effective width of slab: 727 mm
Total height of slab: 797 mm (without formwork)
Masses:
Steel beams:
HEA800 Section: 285.8 cm
2

Part encased: 285.8 b
f
t
f
= 201.8 cm
2

Total mass of beams: 0.02858x12x30x7850 = 80767 kg
Overlength: 2x200 mm
Corrected mass: 81844 kg
Formwork:
Spacing between beams: 0.727 m
Formwork width: 0.727 0.015 2 x 0.030 = 0.652 m
Formwork section: 0.652 x 0.065 = 0.04238 m2
Total volume: 11 x 0.04238 x 30 = 13.98 m3
Total masse: 13.98 x 2450 = 34264 kg

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 219 / 242
Concrete:
Total height: 0.1+0.79-0.028 = 0.862 m
Gross section: (10-1.5) x 0.862 + 1.5 x 0.35 = 7.852 m
2

Net section: 7.852 12 x 0.02018 11 x 0.04238 = 7.144 m
2

Total volume: 7.144 x 30 = 214.3 m
3

Total mass: 214.3 x 2475 = 530417 kg
Total mass (concrete+steel): 80767 + 34264 + 530417 = 645448 kg
Total mass of cantilevering: 1.5 x 0.35 x 30 x 2475 = 38981 kg
Sum of reaction per load cases:
Self weight: (645448-38981) x 9.81 = 5949.4 kN
Cantilevering weight: 38981 x 9.81 = 382.4 kN

ACOBRI values:
Masses:
RV CS PP
Actual mass of beams (kg) 80767 80770
3
) 214.3 214.3
Total mass of formwork (kg) 34264 34280
Sum of the reactions on piers and abutments:
RV CS PP
Self weight (kN) 5949.4 5949.5 5949.5
Cantilevering (kN) 382.4 382.4 382.4

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 220 / 242
7.6.2 Under EN rules
TEST N6 EN
Road bridge Eurocode EN rules
Filler beam deck Twelve beams, two spans
Same as Test 6 but under Eurocode EN
File: TEST_6EN.APM
Reactions on the abutments under dead loads.
Masses:
RV CS
Actual mass of beams (kg) 80767 80770
3
) 214.3 214.3
Total mass of formwork (kg) 34264 34280
Sum of the reactions on piers and abutments:
RV ACOBRI
Self weight (kN) 5949.4 5949.5
Cantilevering (kN) 382.4 382.4

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 221 / 242
7.7 Test n7
TEST N7
Road bridge French rules
Normal beams Two beams, single span
Same bridge as Test n1 but:
Slab: Light concrete; = 2200 kg/m
3

File: TEST_7.APM
Modular ratios.

References values:

Under French rules, the modular ratios for light concrete are given by the following
expressions:
Live loads: m = 6
2 / 3
b
2500
|
|
\
|
= E
a
/ E
b

Dead loads: m = 2 E
a
/ E
b

With:
p
: Mass per unit of volume of concrete
b
= 2200 kg/m
3

So:
E
b
= 37173 MPa
Live loads: m = 6
2 / 3
b
2500
|
|
\
|
= 7.27
Dead loads: m = 2 E
a
/ E
b
= 14.54

ACOBRI values:

RV CS PP
Modular ratio for dead loads 14.54 14.54 14.54
Modular ratio for live loads 7.27 7.27 7.27

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 222 / 242
8 VALIDATION OF SPECIFIC VERIFICATIONS
8.1 Concrete crossgirders
The objective of this chapter is to validate the specific verifications carried out in ACOBRI for
concrete crossgirders on intermediate piers.
The bridge considered for these validations is the reference road bridge, as defined in
chapter 3.1, for which concrete crossgirders are specified at each intermediate piers. The
crossgirders are supposed to be poured at the same moment as the slab: there is no
continuity of the beams for weight load case, the continuity being obtained for all other load
cases.
All other parameters being the same, the effects of load cases but weight are identical for
this bridge and for the reference road bridge. Under weight load case, the bending moments
are equal to zero in sections at intermediate piers, the continuity being not yet realized.

ROAD BRIDGE WITH TRIMMERS
The same bridge as the reference road bridge (see chapter 3.1).
Concrete crossgirders at intermediate piers. The concrete of the crossgirders is poured at
the same time as the concrete of the slab.
File: ROAD_DIN_1_CH.APM
Specific verifications at section of crossgirders

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 223 / 242
8.1.1 ULS Verifications
The resistance under negative moment of a section at intermediate piers (so at crossgirders)
is calculated with this principle: the resistant bending moment is equal to the elastic bending
resistance of a section made up of the following parts:

- the lower flange (acting in compression)
- the reinforcement (acting in tension)

Figure 85 : Negative resistant bending moment at intermediate piers with crossgirders

References values:

Moments at intermediates piers for the reference road bridge (kNm):

Reference road bridge
File of girder 1 File of girder 2 File of girder 3
Piers Pier 1 Pier 2 Pier 1 Pier 2 Pier 1 Pier 2
Maximal negative moment
under ULS combinations
4207 4206 3832 3835 4222 4222
Negative moment under
weight load case
924.9 924.9 930.3 930.3 804.3 804.3

The theoretical maximal negative moment M
t
under ULS combinations for the bridge
with trimmers can then be calculated with the following relation:
M
t
= M
ULS
1.35 M
W

With:
M
ULS
: Maximal negative moment under ULS combinations for reference road
bridge
M
W
: Negative moment under weight load case for reference road bridge
Elastic neutral
axis

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 224 / 242

Road bridge with crossgirders
Girder n1 Girder n2 Girder n3
Piers Pier 1 and Pier 2 Pier 1 and Pier 2 Pier 1 and Pier 2
Maximal negative moment
under ULS combinations
M
Ed
(kNm)
2958 2576 3136

The theoretical resistant moment of the sections at intermediate piers, calculated with
the principles explained before (see Figure 85) are given in the following table:

Road bridge with crossgirders

Pier 1 and
Pier 2
Pier 1 and
Pier 2
Pier 1 and
Pier 2
Effective width of the slab (mm) 2558 2558 2529
Location of elastic neutral axis about
bottom (mm)
461.7 389.4 459.0
Second moment of area (cm
4
) 360646 311053 358456
Elastic modulus of inertia of
reinforcement W
rein
(cm
3
)
6460 5754 6390
Elastic modulus of inertia of the flange
W
f
(cm
3
)
7812 7991 7809
Resistant moment M
Rd
(kNm) 2808 2502 2778
Ratio M
Ed
/ M
Rd
1.053 1.030 1.129

The resistant moment M
Rd
is the minimum of the two values:

- W
rein
f
yrein
/
v

- W
f
f
y
/
M0

ACOBRI values:

RV Pier 1 Pier 2 RV Pier 1 Pier 2 RV Pier 1 Pier 2
M
Ed
2958 2963 2957 2576 2576 2579 3136 3136 3136
M
Rd
2808 2808 2807 2502 2528 2528 2778 2777 2777
Ratio 1.053 1.06 1.05 1.030 1.02 1.02 1.129 1.13 1.13

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 225 / 242
8.1.2 SLS Verifications
The stresses in the section at crossgirder are calculated for a negative moment by
considering that only the bottom flange and the reinforcement are acting as a composite
section. The web and the upper flange are supposed no to work. So that the elastic modulus
of inertia to be used are those calculated in the previous chapter.
The theoretical stresses are calculated by replacing the new modulus in the calculations
carried out for the reference road bridge and by considering that bending moments at piers
under weight load case are equal to zero.
The theoretical and the results obtained with ACOBRI are summarized in the following table:

RV Pier 1 Pier 2 RV Pier 1 Pier 2 RV Pier 1 Pier 2
W
rein
6460 6458 6458 5817 5816 5816 6390 6389 6389
W
bot
7812 7812 7812 7991 7990 7990 7809 7809 7809
rein
311.9 312.3 312.2 301.8 295.1 295.1 317.9 318.2 318.2
rein
0.780 0.78 0.78 0.753 0.74 0.74 0.795 0.80 0.80
top
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bot
284.3 284.9 284.5 247.0 241.4 241.6 295.3 295.6 295.5
bot
0.646 0.65 0.65 0.561 0.55 0.55 0.671 0.67 0.67

With:

W
rein
: elastic modulus of inertia of the reinforcement (in cm
3
)
W
bot
: elastic modulus of inertia of the lower flange (in cm
3
)
rein
: stress in reinforcement under non frequent SLS combinations (MPa)
rein
: Ratio =
rein
/ (0.8 f
sk
)
top
: stress in the upper flange under characteristic SLS combinations (MPa)
bot
: stress in the lower flange under characteristic SLS combinations (MPa)
bot
: Ratio =
bot
/ (f
y
/ g
M,ser
)

The most important deviation observed is 2.2 % for the stress in reinforcement of the girder
n2.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 226 / 242
8.2 Web buckling (ULS)
TEST NV1
Normal beams Two beams, two spans
Steel section HE1000A.
Steel grade: S460
File: TEST_ROAD_V1.APM
Criteria to be controlled:
Web buckling and interaction

The buckling of the web is verified according to DIN103 5.2.
The dimensions of the sections are:
- Height: h
t
= 990 mm
- Flange width: b
f
= 300 mm
- Flange thickness: t
f
= 31 mm
- Web thickness: t
w
= 16.5 mm
- Radius: r
c
= 30 mm
The height of the web is then: b
w
= h
t
2 t
f
= 928 mm
Yield strength to be considered: f
y
= 440 MPa, then = 0,731
b
w
/ t
w
= 56.2 > 72 = 52,6: the web buckling should be verified.

The section controlled is the left section on the intermediate pier. The shear forces calculated
by ACOBRI for this section are:
Load case V (kN) M (kNm)
Weight (W) 408.54 -1766.5
Superstructure (SS) 153.40 -589.2
Superstructure + (SSP) 171.65 -660.0
Thermal loads under + T (THP) -21.38 132.2
Thermal loads under - T (THM) 21.38 -132.2
Shrinkage (SH) 40.75 -855.6
Live loads UDL (UDL) 276.37 -980.9 (*)
Live loads TS (TS) 410.19 -375.7 (*)
Live footways (FW) 61.61 -221.7 (*)
Live loads UDL (UDL) 276.37 (*) -980.9
Live loads TS (TS) 294.1 (*) -701.7
Live footways (FW) 61.6 (*) -221.7
(*): concomitant values

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 227 / 242

According to these values, the most unfavourable ULS combination to be considered is:
1.35 W + 1.35 SSP + 1.35 SH + 1.50 UDL + 1.50 TS + 0.75 FW
For this combination, the forces and moments to be considered are:

Maximum shear force
Concomitant moment
Maximum moment
Concomitant shear force
Shear force V
Sd
(kN) 1914.3 1672.0
Bending Moment M
Sd
(kNm) -6632 -7121

The shear resistant force for buckling effects is given by:
V
cRd
=
v
b
w
t
w
f
y
/ ( 3
M1
)
The reduction factor is calculated from the relative slenderness of the web:
E
=
2
E t
w
2
/ [12 (1 -
2
) b
w
2
] = 60.0 MPa
k
= 5.34
cr
= k
t

E
= 320.4 MPa
w
= 0,76
cr y
/ f = 0.891
So
v
= 0.83 /
w
= 0.932
And V
cRd
= 3295 kN
And:
Maximum shear force
Concomitant moment
Maximum moment
3
= V
Sd
/ V
cRd
0.58 0.51

The maximal value of
3
is then
3
= 0.58

Value given by ACOBRI: V
Sd
/ V
cRd
= 0.58

Because
3
> 0.5, the interaction criteria for the web buckling should be verified too. The
following relation should be used:
1
+ [1 - M
fRd
/ M
pl.Rd
](2
3
- 1)
2
< 1
Calculation of negative resistant moments:
M
fRd
= 4713 kNm
M
plRd
= 7710 kNm, all the web being considered
M
plRd
= 6720 kNm, for a Class 3 web and Class 1 flanges, only 20 t
w
in the
compressive part of the web being considered.

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 228 / 242
The interaction criteria can then be calculated:

Maximum shear force
Concomitant moment
Maximum moment
1
= M
Sd
/ M
plRd
0.986 1.059
1
+ [1 - M
fRd
/ M
pl.Rd
](2
3
- 1)
2
0.995 1.059

The maximal value of the interaction criterion is then:
1
+ [1 - M
fRd
/ M
pl.Rd
](2
3
- 1)
2
= 1.059

The value given by ACOBRI for this criterion is equal to: 1.06

8.3 Class 3 Sections (ULS)
TEST NV2
Normal beams Four beams, two spans
Steel section HE700AA.
Steel grade: imposed yielding strength f
y
= 460 MPa.
File: TEST ROAD V2.APM
Bending resistance for Class 3 Sections.

The ULS criterion of resistance of a section under negative moment is controlled here after
for the section on the intermediate pier. The moments to be considered are (calculated by
ACOBRI):

Load Case Symbol Bending
moment
(kNm)
Normal force
in the slab
(kN)
Weight W -202.0
Superstructure + SSP -129.3
Superstructure SS -121.3
Equipment E 0
Thermal loads +T total bending THP 37.5 410.9
Thermal loads +T hyperstatic effect 125.8
Thermal loads -T total bending THM -37.5 -410.9

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 229 / 242
Thermal loads +T hyperstatic effect -125.8
Shrinkage SH -243.6 0
Shrinkage hyperstatic effect -243.6
Live load UDL maximal effect UDL -147.1
Live load TS maximal effect TS -170.4
Footways maximal effect FT -71.2

The ULS combinations to be considered are:

Index Combination
ULS-1 1.35 W + 1.35 SSP + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 UDL + 1.5 TS + 0.75 FW
ULS-2 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 UDL + 1.5 TS + 0.75 FW
ULS-3 1.35 W + 1.35 SSP + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TKP + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW
ULS-4 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TKP + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW
ULS-5 1.35 W + 1.35 SSP + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TKM + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW
ULS-6 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TKM + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW
ULS-7 1.35 W + 1.35 SSP + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 UDL + 1.5 TS + 0.75 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-8 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 UDL + 1.5 TS + 0.75 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-9 1.35 W + 1.35 SSP + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TKP + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-10 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TKP + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-11 1.35 W + 1.35 SSP + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TKM + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW + 1.35 SH
ULS-12 1.35 W + 1.35 SS + 1.35 EQ + 1.5 TKM + 0.6 UDL + 1.125 TS + 0.3 FW + 1.35 SH

The class of the section under negative moment is:
= 460 / 235 = 0.715
Class of the flange in compression (lower flange), from Table II-5.3.1 of DIN 103:
b
f
= 300 mm then c = 150 mm
t
f
= 17 mm then c / t
f
= 8,82
Then 11 = 7.865 < c / t
f
< 15 = 10.7
Then the flange is class 3
Class of the web, from Table II-5.3.1 of DIN 103:
Location of plastic neutral axis under negative moment: z
ANP
= 461.8 mm
Height of the section: h
t
= 670 mm
Thickness of the flange: t
f
= 17 mm
Radius: r
c
= 27 mm
Thickness of the web: t
w
= 13 mm
The plastic neutral axis is located in the web. The coefficient is then:

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 230 / 242

Figure 86 : Dimensions of the section Location of plastic neutral axis

d = h
t
2 (t
f
+ r
c
) = 582 mm
= (z
ANP
t
f
r
c
) / d = 0.718
d / t
w
= 44.76
456 / (13 1) = 39.07 > d / t
w

The web is then not a class 2 web. The Class of the web is then 3 or 4 and has to
be assessed from the elastic distribution of stresses:
Location of the elastic neutral axis under negative moment: z
ANE
= 405 mm.

Figure 87 : Location of elastic neutral axis
When the lower flange is under compression at the yielding stress, the tension
stress
t
at the top of the flat part of the web is:
t
= -f
y
(h
t
t
f
r
c
z
ANE
) / z
ANE
= -0.546 f
y

Then = -0.546
42 / (0.67 + 0.33 ) = 61.3 > d / t
w
= 44.76. Then Class 3 Web.

Then the section is a class 3 section.

+fy
t
zANE = 405
Elastic neutral axis
d
670
300
20
17
13
zANP = 461.8
Plastic neutral axis
d
d

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 231 / 242
The verification of the bending resistance is then carried out by verifying the following
relations:
t
f
y
/
M0
and
b
f
y
/
M0

With:
t
,
b
: stresses in the upper and lower flange of the section
f
y
: yielding stress f
y
= 460 MPa
M0
: partial factor:
M0
= 1.0
The stresses are calculated from the moments given before and from the elastic modulus of
the section, given in the following table (calculated by ACOBRI):
State of the slab Construction
phase
Cracked
concrete
Elastic modulus upper flange (cm
3
) -4260 -7742
Elastic modulus lower flange (cm
3
) 4260 5056
The stresses obtained are (see chapter 2.2 for sign convention):
Stress (MPa) Ratio
/ (f
y

M0
)
Upper flange -197.5 0.43
Lower flange 268.3 0.58
The verification of this section with ACOBRI gives Class 3 and the following stresses:
Stress (MPa) Ratio
/ (f
y

M0
)
Upper flange -197.43 0.43
Lower flange 268.3 0.58

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 232 / 242
8.4 Class 4 Sections (ULS)
TEST NV4
Foot bridge DIN rules
Normal beams Four beams, ten spans
Steel section HE280 A.
Steel grade: imposed yielding strength f
y
= 460 MPa.
Bending resistance for Class 4 Sections.

Class of the HE280A section:

Figure 88 : Dimensions of the section
f
y
= 460 MPa
=
y
f / 235 = 0.761
Class of the web under pure compression:
Reference: Table II-5.3.1 sheet 1 of DIN 103
d = h
t
2 (t
f
+ r
c
) = 196 mm
d / t
w
= 24.5 38 = 27.16
The class of the web is 2.
Class of the flange under compression:
Reference: Table II-5.3.1 sheet 3 of DIN 103
c = b
f
/ 2 = 140 mm
c / t
f
= 10.76 > 15 = 10.72
The class of the flange is 4.

The class of the HE280A section is 4.

bf = 280
ht = 270
tf = 13
tw = 8
rc = 24

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 233 / 242
Effective section:
The web is class 2 under pure compression, so it is completely effective.
A flange under compression is class 4 and its effective width is given by:
b
eff
= b
f
= 265.7 mm
= 0.948 from DIN 103 III 4.4 (2) equation (4.3)
Considering the upper flange in tension and then completely effective and the
parameters of the slab:
Effective width of concrete: L
part
= 1.3 m
Slab thickness: E
D
= 150 mm
Reinforcement ratio: 1 %
the characteristics of the section are:

Construction phase
(no slab)
Other loads
Second moment of area (cm
4
) 13358 21347
Neutral axis location (cm) 137.5 174.7
Elastic modulus for the upper flange (cm
3
) 2240.1 1008.3
Elastic modulus for the lower flange (cm
3
) 1221.9 971.4

Verification of the section on the first intermediate pier:
The ULS criterion of resistance of a section under negative moment is controlled here after
for the section on the first intermediate pier. The moments to be considered are (calculated
by ACOBRI):

Load Case Bending
moment
(kNm)
Weight -83.7
Superstructure + -16.1
Superstructure -24.7
Equipment 0
Thermal loads +T (1) 28.4
Thermal loads -T (1) -28.4
Shrinkage (1) -50.8
Foot bridge live load -73.7
(1): hyperstatic effect

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 234 / 242
The stresses in lower and upper flange are calculated for the ULS combination. The maximal
values obtained are:
Upper flange:
t
= 206.9 MPa
Lower flange:
b
= -290.1 MPa
Because of the class 4, the limit for stresses is f
y
/
M1
= 418.2 MPa.
The stresses calculated by ACOBRI are:
t
= 206.9 MPa (Deviation < 1 %)
b
= -290.1 MPa (Deviation < 1 %)
The limit for these stresses considered by ACOBRI is
lim
= 418.2 MPa

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 235 / 242
8.5 Shear stresses for double sections
8.5.1 Box girders
TEST NV3
Steel section HE800B.
Box girders
Shear stresses.

Shear section of a HE800B section: A
v
= 161.8 cm
2

Shear section for a box girder (2 HE800B): A
v
= 323.6 cm
2

The section controlled is the left section on the intermediate pier. The shear forces and the
torsional moments calculated by ACOBRI for this section are:
Load case V (kN) M
t
(kNm)
Weight (W) 478.4 0
Superstructure (SS) 185.8 0
Superstructure + (SSP) 208.1 -2.7
Thermal loads under + T (THP) -25.8 0
Thermal loads under - T (THM) 25.8 0
Shrinkage (SH) 51.5 0
Live loads UDL (UDL) 332.5 -12.0 (*)
Live loads TS (TS) 416.9 -85.3 (*)
Live footways (FW) 73.6 8.3 (*)
(*): Concomitant values

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 236 / 242

The maximal shear force in the section under characteristic combination is then:
V
Sd
= 1539.8 kN with a concomitant torsional moment: M
t
= -95.2 kNm
And the associated shear stress should be:
= V
Sd
/ A
v
+ M
t
/ (2 t
w
) = 47.6 + 11.8 = 59.4 MPa
where = (h
t
t
f
) b
f
= 2301 cm
2

The stress calculated by ACOBRI is:
= 59.50 MPa (Deviation < 1 %)
The shear area given by ACOBRI is:
A
v
= 323.5 cm2

8.5.2 Box girders filled with concrete
TEST NV3b
Box girders filled with concrete Two beams, two spans
Steel section HE800B.
Box girders
File: TEST ROAD V3B.APM
Shear stresses.

In this case, the box girder is not closed, so that the torsional moments do not induce shear
stresses in the web.

Shear section of a HE800B section: A
v
= 161.8 cm
2

Shear section for a box girder (2 HE800B): A
v
= 323.6 cm
2

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 237 / 242
The section controlled is the left section on the intermediate pier. The shear forces calculated
by ACOBRI for this section are:
Load case V (kN)
Weight (W) 542.7
Superstructure (SS) 171.1
Superstructure + (SSP) 191.5
Thermal loads under + T (THP) -28.9
Thermal loads under - T (THM) 28.9
Shrinkage (SH) 57.7
Live loads UDL (UDL) 308.5
Live loads TS (TS) 412.8
Live footways (FW) 79.9

The maximal shear force in the section under characteristic combination is then:
V
Sd
= 1570.6 kN
And the associated shear stress should be:
= V
Sd
/ A
v
= 48.54 MPa
= 48.5 MPa (Deviation <= 1 %)
The shear area given by ACOBRI is:
A
v
= 323.5 cm2

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 238 / 242
8.6 Normal stresses for specific sections
8.6.1 Box girders and concrete haunches
The bridge of the test V3 (see chapter 8.5.1) is considered here. The normal stresses in the
lower flange of the mid span section will be calculated hereafter.
Considering the following parameters of the slab:
- effective width L
p
= 4.0 m
- haunches thickness z
D
= 100 mm
- slab thickness E
D
= 250 mm
the properties of the section are calculated for each state of the concrete:

State of concrete Modular ratio
Neutral Axis
location (mm)
Second moment
of area (cm
4
)
Elastic modulus
of the lower
flange (cm
3
)
Construction 400 718162 17954
Permanent loads 16.04 701.6 2010625 28656
Shrinkage or
thermal loads
16.22 699.9 2002991 28618
Live loads 6.31 839.6 2637021 31408

The elastic modulus of the lower flange calculated by ACOBRI are:

State of concrete
Elastic modulus
of the lower
flange (cm
3
)
Construction 17954
Permanent loads 28657
Shrinkage or
thermal loads
28618
Live loads 31408

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 239 / 242

The bending moments in the section and the normal force in the slab, calculated by ACOBRI
are:

Load case M (kNm) N (kN)
Weight (W) 1154.9
Superstructure (SS) 517.5
Superstructure + (SSP) 579.7
Thermal loads under + T (THP) (1) -97.7 1294.7
Thermal loads under - T (THM) (1) 97.7 -1294.7
Shrinkage (SH) (1) 660.9 -4013.5
Live loads UDL (UDL) (2) 1296.0
Live loads TS (TS) (2) 2158.8
Live footways (FW) (2) 306.6
(1): global moments (isostatic + hyperstatic)
(2): maximal positive moments

The associated bending normal stresses in the lower flange, considering a non cracked
concrete, are:
= M / W + N / A
Where: M: Bending moment
W: Elastic modulus of the lower flange
N: Normal force in the slab if any
A: composite area of the section

The values of for each load case are then:

Load case (MPa)
Weight (W) 64,33
Superstructure (SS) 18,06
Superstructure + (SSP) 20,23
Thermal loads under + T (THP) (1) 6,66
Thermal loads under - T (THM) (1) -6,66
Shrinkage (SH) (1) -8,14
Live loads UDL (UDL) (2) 41,26
Live loads TS (TS) (2) 68,73
Live footways (FW) (2) 9,76

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 240 / 242
And then, the envelope stress in the lower flange under characteristic combination should be:
= 203.43 MPa
= 203.4 MPa (Deviation <= 1 %)

8.6.2 Box girders and reinforcement
The bridge of the test V3 (see chapter 8.5.1) is considered here. The section on intermediate
pier is reinforde by a single plate for the double section (dimensions: 500x25). The normal
stresses should then be calculated in the lower fibre of the reinforcement (and not in the
lower flange).
Considering the following parameters of the slab:
- effective width L
p
= 3.34 m
- haunches thickness z
D
= 100 mm
- slab thickness E
D
= 250 mm
- reinforcement ratio = 1.8 %
the properties of the section are calculated for each state of the concrete:

State of concrete
Neutral Axis
location (mm)
Second moment
of area (cm
4
)
Elastic modulus
of the lower
flange (cm
3
)
Construction 335.0 897411 24927
Other loads 449.4 1559087 32863

The elastic modulus of the lower flange calculated by ACOBRI are:

State of concrete
Elastic modulus
of the lower
flange (cm
3
)
Construction 24929
Other loads 32857

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 241 / 242

The bending moments in the section and the normal force in the slab, calculated by ACOBRI
are:

Load case M (kNm) N (kN)
Weight (W) -2560.6
Superstructure (SS) -914.2
Superstructure + (SSP) -1024.0
Thermal loads under + T (THP) (1) 646.4 1294.7
Thermal loads under - T (THM) (1) -646.4 -1294.7
Shrinkage (SH) (1) -1287.6 0
Live loads UDL (UDL) (2) -1485.7
Live loads TS (TS) (2) -896.6
Live footways (FW) (2) -336.0
(1): hyperstatic moments
(2): maximal negative moments

The associated bending normal stresses in the lower flange, considering a cracked concrete,
are:
= M / W
The values of for each load case are then:

Load case (MPa)
Weight (W) -102,72
Superstructure (SS) -27,82
Superstructure + (SSP) -31,16
Thermal loads under + T (THP) (1) 19,67
Thermal loads under - T (THM) (1) -19,67
Shrinkage (SH) (1) -39,18
Live loads UDL (UDL) (2) -45,21
Live loads TS (TS) (2) -27,28
Live footways (FW) (2) -10,22

And then, the envelope stress in the lower flange under characteristic combination should be:
= -262.47 MPa

Validation Manual

CTICM / R 13.010-01 / Rv. B 242 / 242
= -262.49 MPa (Deviation <= 1 %)

Validation Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Validation Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

v3.

+ for the considered bridge with two slow lanes.

S-ar putea să vă placă și